JP6824144B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Patent Document 1 describes a pachinko machine in which different jackpot probabilities are set according to a set value.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 5-285258

The conventional technique is a game machine whose settings can be changed, but there is room for improvement in the control process related to the settings.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of executing efficient control processing related to setting.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a superordinate concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution means a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game, and a setting changing device capable of changing at least a setting related to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery. , A setting-related process executing means for executing a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when the setting is changed or a setting reference process executed when referring to the setting, and an arrangement in the game area. Base calculation means for calculating the base based on the winning opening, the number of winning balls paid out when the game ball enters the winning opening, and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired in the game area. A base including at least one of a base display device that displays the base and a base calculation process that is executed when the base is calculated or a base display process that is executed when the base is displayed on the base display device. A base-related processing execution means for executing related processing, and a limiting means for restricting execution of at least a part of the other processing during execution of one of the setting-related processing and the base-related processing. It is a game machine equipped with.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when a game ball enters the starting winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(2) At least, it is provided with a setting changing device capable of changing the setting related to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery described in (1) above. The setting changing device is a device for switching settings, and is a device that is operated by operating buttons, levers, and other devices provided in the game machine. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of symbols that the condition device will operate (the special game will be executed) is displayed.

The setting changing device may be a device capable of changing the setting by adding other items in addition to the item related to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery described in (1) above. Further, the setting changing device may be a device capable of changing the setting related to the exit of the ball.

(3) A setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when changing the setting in (2) above or a setting reference process executed when referencing a setting is executed. The setting-related processing includes processing executed during setting change (setting change mode, setting change state) or setting reference (setting reference mode, setting reference state).

(4) A winning opening (starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is arranged in the game area.

(5) The base is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the winning opening of (4) above and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired in the game area. The base can be calculated by an operation such as "base = number of prize balls ÷ number of outs x 100". The number of prize balls can be grasped based on the detection signal of the winning opening switch or the like. The number of outs can be grasped based on the detection signal of the out switch or the like. The base can be calculated by an operation using division, or can be calculated by an operation using repeated subtraction.

(6) A base display device for displaying the base of (5) above is provided. The base display device may be a performance display monitor or a main display (various lamps included in the game status display device of the integrated display board, and may be a display device different from the performance display monitor or the main display device. There may be.

(7) Base-related processing including at least one of the base calculation processing executed when calculating the base of (5) above or the base display processing executed when displaying the base on the base display device of (6) above. To execute. The base-related processing can include not only the processing executed during the execution of the base calculation processing or the base display processing, but also the processing necessary for calculating the base and the processing necessary for displaying the base.

(8) Then, during the execution of one of the setting-related processing and the base-related processing, the execution of at least a part of the other processing is restricted (not executed). When one process is a setting-related process, the other process is a base-related process. When one process is a base-related process, the other process is a setting-related process. The other process may restrict the execution of all processes or may restrict the execution of some processes.

As described above, according to the present solution, the execution of at least a part of the other processing is restricted during the execution of one of the setting-related processing and the base-related processing. During execution, at least a part of the other process is not executed, and the load of control processing is reduced compared to the method in which both processes (setting-related process and base-related process) are continuously executed. As a result, efficient control processing related to the setting can be executed.

Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution has, in any of the above-mentioned solutions, a first process execution means for executing the first process required for executing the game and a second process execution means not required for executing the game. A second process execution means for executing the process is provided, and the limiting means determines whether or not one of the processes is being executed, and if the determination result is affirmative, at least one of the other processes. It is determined that the execution of the processing of the unit is restricted, and if the determination result is negative, the determination processing that determines not to restrict the execution of at least a part of the other processing is executed, and the second processing execution means Is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination process is executed as the process included in the second process.

The following features are added to the present solution.
(1) A first process execution means for executing the first process required for executing the game is provided.
The first process is a process in which the game cannot be performed unless this process is executed (process of the used area). The first process is, for example, a process of executing a predetermined lottery, changing a symbol, or executing a special game.

(2) A second process execution means for executing a second process that is not necessary for executing the game is provided.
The second process is a process that allows the game to be played without executing this process (process outside the area). The second process is, for example, a process of calculating a base value to be displayed on a performance display monitor or controlling a test signal.

(3) The limiting means determines whether or not one process is being executed, and if the judgment result is affirmative, restricts (does not execute) the execution of at least a part of the other process. If the decision is made and the decision result is negative, the decision process that determines that the execution of at least a part of the other process is not restricted (executed) is executed.

(4) The second process executing means of the above (2) executes the determination process of the above (3) as a process included in the second process.

As described above, according to the present solution, since the determination process is executed in the second process, it is possible to prevent the determination process from being executed in the first process, and the first process (to control the progress of the game). It is possible to reduce the amount of program code (processes executed in the area where the usable capacity is defined by the game machine rules).
If there is a margin in the amount of program code in the first process, if there are circumstances in which the decision process cannot be executed in the second process, or if the decision process must be executed in the first process, etc. , The determination process may be executed in the first process.

Solution 3: When the gaming machine of the present solution is capable of displaying the set value or the base in any of the above-mentioned solutions, and is displaying the set value. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the base is not displayed and the value of the setting is not displayed when the base is displayed.

According to the present solution, the base display device can display the set value (set value) or the base, and does not display the base when displaying the set value, but displays the base. Since the setting value is not displayed at the time, not only can the hardware resource of the base display device be used for two purposes, one for setting and the other for base, but also only the setting value is displayed or only the base is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid misunderstandings and confusions between the setting changer and the base confirmer.

According to the present invention, efficient control processing related to setting can be executed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows a part of a game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the internal function composition of an effect control device. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the memory area used by the main control CPU 72. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a figure which shows the state of the setting key, the possibility of changing a setting, and the possibility of inserting / removing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of the CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of the CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure which shows the command transmission timing of the 1st procedure example of the CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of the CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of the CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure which shows the command transmission timing of the 2nd procedure example of the CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the main loop processing. It is a figure which shows the content of the process which is executed when a serial communication reception interrupt occurs. It is a figure which shows the content of the process which is executed when a timer interrupt occurs. It is a figure which shows the content of the process which is executed when an interrupt occurs at the time of power-off notice. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the serial communication reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of interrupt processing at the time of power-off notice. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the dynamic port output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the performance display monitor output processing. It is a figure which shows the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing. It is a figure which shows the modification form of a timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the setting change processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the setting change processing (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (low-probability, high-probability non-time shortening state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (special section) at the time of deviation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability, high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (special section). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the variation pattern determination processing at the time of disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special variation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special variation number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of LED display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of the addition number calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of the addition number calculation process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game state and the number of fired balls. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the performance display monitor control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the ball number addition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the performance display monitor total division processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of a division task 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of a division task 2-8. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of a division task 9. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the performance display monitor 200. It is a figure explaining the section of the base displayed on the performance display monitor 200. It is a figure explaining the calculation method of a base. It is a timing chart which shows the setting-related processing basic operation (1/3). It is a timing chart which shows the setting-related processing basic operation (2/3). It is a timing chart which shows the setting-related processing basic operation (3/3). It is a figure which shows the processing example at the time of power-on (the first processing example). It is a figure which shows the processing example at the time of power-on (the second processing example). It is a figure which shows the processing example at the time of power-on (the third processing example). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a firing position management process. It is a figure explaining the game flow in the non-time reduction state. It is a figure explaining the game flow in the time shortened state. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning). It is a figure which shows the production example of a challenge bonus production. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the treasure challenge production. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the fireworks bonus production. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a normal bonus production partially. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big hit time variation effect pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of mode effect management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the processing at the time of operation of a variable winning device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

Here, in the present specification, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated so as to face the pachinko machine 1, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the top side when viewed from the player. The explanation is that the lower side is the lower side when viewed from the player, the front side is the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is the rear side when viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 is provided with fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed by using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper plate 6b, a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize can be stored. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit), and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium charged in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the CR machine is taken as an example, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game ball is received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 to launch (drive) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 50, 52, and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 can perform a plurality of types of operations (press once, press multiple times, repeatedly hit, long press, etc.) and accept operation input. The player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45 (operation input), for example, while the symbol is changing or the jackpot is confirmed. Alternatively, some kind of effect (notice effect, probabilistic promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) can be generated during the jackpot game.

Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change, for example, the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be seen in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204. ..

The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays the base. Further, the performance display monitor 200 displays a set value (set value).

The four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each of the 7-segment LEDs has seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. It is composed of.
The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM (initializing RAM 76), that is, initializing RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit. Further, the setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing a setting or referencing a setting.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert the setting key and rotate it while the transparent case is still sealed.

The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for clearing the RAM, and when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the RAM clear signal is input to the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92, and the RAM clear process is performed. Is executed. The RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power supply control unit 162. Further, when the RAM clear signal is not input to the payout control device 92 and the main control device 70 receives the input of the RAM clear signal, the main control device 70 transmits a RAM clear command to the payout control device 92. May be good.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The above-mentioned payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numerals), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island facility to secure the ground of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 is provided with a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state) or a latent probability change state (high probability non-time reduction state), and is a game area 8a. The right part of is a second game area (right-handed area, specific area) used in an advantageous game state (big hit game state, small hit game state, low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, etc.). .. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a.
Further, the second variable winning device 31, the starting gate 20, the first variable winning device 30, and the variable starting winning device 28 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a.

The three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is located between the starting gate 20 and the first variable winning device 30. Have been placed.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, or enters the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation in the process of flowing down. , Passing through the starting gate 20, entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and entering the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation.

Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly enters the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, passes through the starting gate 20, or enters the normal winning opening 24. Alternatively, there is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation or entering the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent plate, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the left portion area (left-handed) in the game area 8a is used. It is necessary to hit the game ball into the area) (perform so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when the game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (perform so-called "right hit").

The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the right starting winning opening 28a (starting winning opening) is entered. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has one opening / closing member 28b, and the opening / closing member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by, for example, the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 28b is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right starting winning opening 28a (there is no gap through which the game ball can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls down to the right) to open the right start winning opening 28a. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28a can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the starting winning opening 28a.

The first variable winning device 30 is used when the specified conditions are satisfied (for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. It operates when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "5-round normal symbol" or "5-round probability variation symbol"), and enables winning to the 1st grand prize opening 30b (upper grand prize opening) (special). Electric accessory, first special prize event generation means).

The first variable winning device 30 has one opening / closing member 30a, and the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the first large winning opening 30b (there is no space for the game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls down to the left) to open the first large winning opening 30b. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 is used when a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (for example, the second special symbol is a "5-round normal symbol" or a "5-round probability change". (Except when stopped and displayed in the form of "design")), it is possible to win a prize in the second special winning opening 31b (lower big winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special winning event occurrence means).

The second variable winning device 31 has one opening / closing member 31a, and the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the second large winning opening 31b (a state in which there is no gap through which the game ball can enter). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls down to the left) to open the second large winning opening 31b. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and can generate the entry into the second large winning opening 31b. At this time, the opening / closing member 31a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 31b.

The arrangement of the obstacle nails and the shape of the structure installed in the game board unit 8 are basically the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a when opened) and the first variable winning device 30 (the first when opened). The mode does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the 1 large winning opening 30b) and the 2nd variable winning device 31 (the 2nd large winning opening 31b at the time of opening), but the variable start while the game ball is open. The winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28a), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) are not always entered. Balls are randomly entered.

The above-mentioned effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from the central position to the right side portion thereof. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board), decorativeness is added by various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. can do.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, an animal character) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, in which the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k can easily flow into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the removed game balls are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (position on the right side in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at a position on the right side in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, 0 memory numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 memory number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memory numbers are displayed and one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, three memory numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (Design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are 0 to 4 each depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, 0 memory numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 memory number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memory numbers are displayed and one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, three memory numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. The individual is displayed, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. (Up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the ball. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball is inserted into the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly functions to control the progress (contents) of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Have. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit (random number generator) 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. ing. Of these, the random number circuit 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the ordinary symbol lottery, and the random numbers generated here are It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 receives each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and controls these interrupt requests based on the priority. .. In addition, the main controller 70 monitors a RAM clear switch 71 for initializing the RAM 76, changing settings, a parallel I / O port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and various states. It is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a reset controller that generates a reset as needed, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main control device 70 may be of the serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided inside the pachinko machine 1, insert the setting key into the setting key keyhole and press the setting key. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting is changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to (setting reference state).

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of the six stages, for example.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment segment LED, or a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.).

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be pulled out from the keyhole for the setting key. By this operation, when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, the dedicated 7-segment segment LED, or the game status display device 38, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Overview of setting changes]
The outline of the setting change is as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is being changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
In the state where the setting is being changed, the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38) is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. LED. When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6.

Then, when the "setting key is OFF", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (hidden) 1" display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off, the normal game state is entered. Transition.

In the present embodiment, the example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used is described, but the setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Overview of setting reference]
The outline of the setting reference is as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the setting reference state (setting reference mode) is set.
Similar to the state in which the setting is being changed, in the state in which the setting is being referenced, the main display is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor, and a set value such as "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, in the state of referencing the setting, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, when the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, when the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being referenced ends, and once before the power is turned off. After shifting to the state, it shifts to the normal gaming state.
In the present embodiment, the setting reference cannot be performed during the normal game, but the setting reference may be executed during the normal game.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The start winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the gaming balls.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 22, and a second winning opening switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 24. It is equipped with 81. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to play a game ball for each ordinary winning opening 22. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, and the second winning opening switch 81 are It is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99. The game board unit 8 joins the game balls that have passed through the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first major winning opening 30b, the second major winning opening 31b, and the out opening 32. A confluence passage is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in this confluence passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the confluence passage, and each time the game ball is detected, a detection signal is input to the main control device 70. The main control device 70 counts the number of out spheres based on the detection signal input from the out switch 99. Here, since the game balls launched into the game area 8a always pass through the confluence passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch 99 determines the number of launched balls launched into the game area 8a. That is, the number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 to the display board 89.

Further, the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of the 7 segments 201 to 204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, it may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal board 87. , The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, and corresponds to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, and the first large winning opening solenoid 90. Two major winning opening solenoids 97 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, and 97 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close (operate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. The blade member 31d for the probability variation region is moved. The solenoids 88, 90, and 97 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 also includes semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM (RAM) 98 together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured as an integrated LSI. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

The payout control device 92 can communicate with the main control device 70, and pays out the game ball based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and a drive circuit for the payout motor 102 is provided on the payout device board 100. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When each prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, the game balls paid out more than that are described above. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle, ball launching device) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be done. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, when the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also used. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with an effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 is built in together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is equipped with various functions required to realize the effect in the pachinko machine 1. For example, to control devices such as VDP152 for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, lamps 46 to 52 for producing visual effects, board lamp 53, movable motor 57, and status LED 58. The driver IC 132, the voice IC 134 for controlling the speakers 54, 55, 56 that output voice, and the like are equipped. The internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to another figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In the communication harness, depending on the bus width of various effects commands (hereinafter, referred to as "sub-commands" or "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. The parallel format may be adopted, or the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56. Further, an effect switching button 45 and a volume adjustment switch (not shown) are connected to the sub connection board 136, and when the player operates the effect changeover button 45 and the volume adjustment switch, their contact signals are transmitted through the sub connection board 136. It is input to the effect control device 124. Further, a jog dial 45a is connected to the sub-connection board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136. Although an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, when the saucer illumination board is installed, the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the saucer illumination board. You may be.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 and a status LED 58 are connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53, the movable motor 57, and the status LED 58 via the driver board 138, respectively.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is mounted on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are external from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores a basic program for controlling the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , A lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the SRAM 182 and RTC 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). , The stored information can be retained for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

The effect control device 124 is a device that controls the content of the effect related to the game.
The RTC184 is a device that can communicate with the effect control device 124 by serial communication or the like and holds the current time information (predetermined information). Further, the RTC 184 is a device that measures the current time and updates the current time information regardless of whether or not the game machine is in a power-off state.

By the way, as described above, the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, 56, the status LED 58, etc. are used to control the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180. Includes control of production using devices. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device, respectively, control devices 134, 152, 198, 199. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the pachinko machine 1 uses each device for effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, displacement of the movable body). Etc.) are realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126. At the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operator. Further, in the individual control stage, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the sensor control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operating units according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, and 199.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, in addition to the circuit board (effect display control board) and CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190 on which the VDP 152 is mounted, the effect control device 124 also includes an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect. It is equipped with LED driver 198, SMC (serial control controller) 199 and driver IC 132.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 mainly used when developing a drawing material and a drawing material decoder 157 for decompressing (decoding) the drawn drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads the necessary drawing material from the CG ROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here, the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The audio IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is connected to an amplifier, an external DRAM, or a CG bus (not shown). Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out the necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded audio to the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56 via the amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (may be a larger number of channels) is realized. Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of various lamps 46 to 53 and the status LED 58 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the movable body motor 57, which is a drive source for the movable body 40f for effect provided inside the effect unit 40. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible to configure the SMC 199 to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps 46 to 53, the movable motor 57, and the status LED 58. Then, by managing the operation, the effect reproduction using the lamp or the movable body is realized. Of the various lamps 46 to 53, the board lamp 53 is an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. It is equivalent. The status LED 58 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and is a lamp that indicates the status state of the effect control device (for example, the state before system initialization, the state after system initialization, the normal state, etc.) by a lighting pattern. Further, although an example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer illumination board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer illumination board is attached to the glass frame decoration lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via the driver IC 132.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated to the effect control unit 210 via the sensor control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the memory area used by the main control CPU 72.
The memory area used by the main control CPU 72 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 74 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 76.

The area (first area) of addresses 0000H to 0BFFH is an area in which the program code (program) of the used area can be stored. The program code of the used area is the first information (for controlling the progress of the game) necessary for executing the game.

The area (first area) of addresses 0000H to 0BFFH is a part of the program code (first information) of the used area and the program code (second information) that is not necessary for executing the game. Contains special program code (special information).

The area of addresses 0C00H to 0FFFH is an unused area.

The area (first area) of addresses 1000H to 1BFFH is an area in which program data (data) of the used area can be stored. The program data of the used area is the first information necessary for executing the game.
The area (first area) of the addresses 1000H to 1BFFH is a part of the program data (first information) of the used area and the program data (second information) that is not necessary for executing the game. Special program data (special information) is stored.

The area of addresses 1C00H to 1FFFH is an unused area.

The area (second area) of addresses 2000H to 2FFFH is an area capable of storing program code / program data outside the area. The program code / program data outside the area is the second information that is not necessary for executing the game (for example, regarding the process for performing the test specified by the game machine rules and the process related to the performance display monitor).
In the area (second area) of addresses 2000H to 2FFFH, the non-special program code / non-special program data (non-special program code) which is the remaining information of the program code / program data (second information) not required for executing the game Special information) is stored.

The area of addresses 3000H to EFFFH is an unused area.

The areas of addresses F000H to F1FFH are used as a work area and a stack RAM of the used area.
The areas of addresses F200H to F3FFH are used as a work area outside the area and a stack RAM.
These areas are used as stack areas for temporarily saving areas and data that are temporarily used when a program in the used area is being executed or a program outside the area is being executed.

The area of addresses F400H to FFFFH is an unused area.

In the memory area of the ROM 74, in addition to the used area and the area outside the area, an area in which arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program is stored, and a program in which information necessary for the main control CPU 72 to execute the program is stored. A management area may be provided.

As described above, the ROM 74 and the RAM 76 (storage means) of the present embodiment have a used area (first area) capable of storing the program code / program data (first information) required for executing the game, and the game. It has an area outside the area (second area) that can store program code / program data (second information) that is not required for execution.

Here, the usable area is an area in which the capacity that can be used for controlling the progress of the game is defined by the game machine rules, and the outside of the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity. ..

The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pachinko based on the program code program data (first information) required for executing the game and the program code program data (second information) not required for executing the game. Control the machine 1 (game machine) (control means).

In the used area (first area), of the program code program data (first information) required for executing the game and the program code program data (second information) not required for executing the game. Special program code and special program data (special information), which are some information, are stored.

Outside the area (second area), non-special program code / non-special program data (non-special information), which is the remaining information of the program code / program data (second information) that is not necessary for executing the game, is present. It is stored.

The special program code / special program data (special information) is information that is different for each model in a plurality of types of models with different game contents, and the non-special program code / non-special program data (non-special information) is the game contents. This is information common to each model in multiple types of models with different values.

Therefore, when changing the specifications of the game machine, it is necessary to change the special program code / special program data. On the other hand, the non-special program code / non-special program data does not need to be changed even when the specifications of the game machine are changed.

In the special program code / special program data (special information), among the processes for calculating the base, the judgment process for determining whether or not to calculate the base based on the game state, and the value of the number of prize balls are confirmed. It contains information about at least one of the confirmation processes. Either the determination process or the confirmation process may be non-special program code / non-special program data (non-special information).

In the present embodiment, due to the performance of the main control CPU 72, even when the same instruction (program code) is used, the processing speed may differ depending on whether it is used in the used area or outside the area. is there. For example, when the LDQ instruction (special load instruction) is used in the used area, the processing speed is increased, but when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, the processing speed is not increased. Therefore, it is inevitable to use the LD instruction (normal load instruction) whose processing speed is slow outside the area. The reason for this is that when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, it is necessary to add the stack pointer, the Q register save, reset, and the return process, so that the processing speed becomes rather slow.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing speed is faster when the process related to the used area is executed than when the process related to the outside of the area is executed.

The main control CPU 72 uses (by executing) the program code / program data stored in the used area (first area) to process the used area (first process) required for executing the game. It can be executed (first processing execution means).

Further, the main control CPU 72 uses (by executing) the program code / program data stored outside the area (second area) to perform processing outside the area (second processing) that is not necessary for executing the game. ) Can be executed (second processing execution means).
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/199".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/32".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example of providing the setting difference only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time reduction state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the state of the setting key, whether or not the setting can be changed, and whether or not the setting can be inserted / removed.
When the state of the setting key is ON (when it is rotated to the right, when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is ON), the setting can be changed (including the setting reference), and the setting key can be pressed. It is impossible to pull it out. In other words, the setting key cannot be removed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.

On the other hand, when the state of the setting key is OFF (when it is rotated to the left, when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is OFF), the setting cannot be changed (including the setting reference), and the setting is made. It is possible to remove the key. In other words, the setting key can be removed unless the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.

For setting change and setting reference, if it is possible to shift to the setting change state or setting reference state without using the "setting key", for example, only by operating a button, a person who does not have the authority to change the setting (for example, hall staff or malicious intent) It is possible for a certain player, etc.) to change the setting or refer to the setting, and there is a risk of setting leakage.
Therefore, the use of the "setting key" is an indispensable condition for setting change and setting reference.

There are two states of the "setting key", ON and OFF. The state of the "setting key" can be confirmed by a signal from the setting key switch 302. Maintain the ON state and OFF state by operating the "setting key".

Only when the state of the "setting key" is OFF, the "setting key" can be inserted and removed. The "setting key" can be inserted into the setting key keyhole 306.
The setting key keyhole 306 exists in a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170, and can be operated without opening the transparent case.

For example, the following conditional branch is included in the program code of the main controller 70.
Include that the setting key is ON in the transition condition to change the setting or refer to the setting.
Include that the setting key is turned from ON to OFF in the transition condition to the setting confirmed state during the setting change. Alternatively, simply include "the setting key is in the OFF state".
Include that the setting key is OFF in the end condition during setting change or setting reference.

As a result, without the "setting key", it is not possible to move during the setting change or setting reference, and the setting value cannot be confirmed. Therefore, the hall manager may not intend to change the setting or leak the setting. Can be prevented.

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main control unit]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the CPU initialization process in the main control device 70. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or conversely clears the backup information to restore the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

10 and 11 are flowcharts showing an example of the first procedure of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority required to control the interrupt request generated during the execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 has a plurality of priorities based on the priority defined in the interrupt vector table. Execute interrupt requests in order.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the values of the input port into which the RAM clear signal is input are acquired twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes the standby process here. This process is a process of waiting for the power supply to stabilize and a process of waiting for the activation of the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 secures a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms, about 3.1 seconds) after the power is turned on, and during that time, a power off warning signal (a signal indicating that the power is being cut off). ) Is checked. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power cutoff warning signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power off warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power off warning signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON. The opening of the inner frame can be confirmed by the contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93. The opening of the inner frame may be confirmed by a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 or another inner frame opening switch (not shown). Further, whether or not the setting key is ON can be confirmed by the input signal from the setting key switch 302.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S110. On the other hand, when the inner frame is opened and it cannot be confirmed that the setting key is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S113 (in-page combiner 1 → 1).

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S112. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S111a.

Step S111a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is “00H”.

The setting changing flag is stored in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76, "00H" indicates that the game is in normal game, "01H" indicates that the setting is being changed / before confirmation, and "02H". Indicates that the setting is being changed or confirmed, and "03H" indicates that the setting is being referenced.

The setting value is also stored in the setting value buffer, and the setting value buffer is not cleared even when the RAM clear is started. The reason for this is that "even if the power is turned off during the setting change and the RAM is cleared and started, the state during the setting change is continued" and "when the setting reference condition is satisfied, the setting changing flag is changed. Because it does not affect the value of the checksum. "

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the setting changing flag is "00H" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S111b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the setting changing flag is "00H" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (in-page combiner 2 → 2).

Step S111b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "03H" in the setting changing flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (in-page combiner 2 → 2).

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "01H" in the setting changing flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (in-page combiner 3 → 3).

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (in-page combiner 3 → 3). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114.

Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether the backup flag and the checksum are normal.

Regarding the backup flag, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup flag is set (whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76). If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the time of the previous power cutoff and a specific value (for example, "01H") is set in the backup flag, it is determined that the backup flag is normal. The backup flag is set to a specific value when a normal backup process is executed.

Regarding the checksum, the main control CPU 72 executes the checksum for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checkssums all the work areas of the RAM 76 except the backup flag and the checksum buffer. If the checksum result is normal, the main control CPU 72 determines that the checksum is normal.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S116. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes an initialization process when the power is restored. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of a part of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a memory area to be cleared when the power is restored.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes a backup restoration process. The main control CPU 72 restores the stored valid backup information. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can restore the state when the power is cut off.

Step S118: The main control CPU 72 sends a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 when the power is restored (for example, a power restoration designation command indicating that the power is restored from the power failure and started) and a payout command (to the issue control device 92). Set the command to be sent). After finishing this process, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S125.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initialization process (RAM clear process) at the time of RAM clear. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of the used area of the RAM 76 to be cleared when the RAM is cleared. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased. The stored contents outside the area of the RAM 76 may or may not be cleared. The value of the setting changing flag may or may not be cleared. If the value of the setting changing flag is cleared, the determination in step S131a described later will always be negative (No). Therefore, when the determination in step S131a described later is performed based on the state before the RAM is cleared, the setting is changed. It is preferable not to clear the value of the medium flag. Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S124: The main control CPU 71 sets a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 when the RAM is cleared (for example, a RAM clear designation command indicating that the RAM clear has been started) and a payout command (command to the payout control device 92). ..

Step S125: The main control CPU 71 executes a common initialization process when the RAM is cleared and when the power is restored.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power return designation command) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes the subcommand output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power return designation command) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the subcommand transmission buffer. In addition, the main control CPU 72 has various other effect commands (for example, model designation command, state specification command, special figure destination determination effect command, operation memory number increase effect command, operation memory number decrease effect) required for effect control. Set commands, count cut counter value commands, normal game management phase commands, special game management phase commands, launch position specification commands, etc.) and output these to the subcommand transmission buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 can set different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent subcommand transmission process (step S144), the effect control device 124 is in the effect state (for example, the effect state) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emitting state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (out-of-page coupler A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting the main command permission signal (communication permission signal). The main command permission signal is a signal that can be independently set by the main control CPU 72 (main control device 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout control device 92).
The main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 are connected by two lines, the first line is a signal line and the second line is a command line.

For example, when the main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 can transmit a command. On the other hand, when the payout control CPU 94 sets the main command permission signal, the main control CPU 72 can transmit the command.

Here, since the main control CPU 72 is executing the process of resetting the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 is in a state where the command cannot be transmitted.

If the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side has not been reset, the main control device 70 can transmit the command. However, since the payout command (prize ball command) is not generated while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, the game ball is not paid out by the payout control device 92. When the main command permission signal can be set in the payout control device 92, the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side may be the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side.

Here, if the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is reset, the payout control device 92 causes a communication error. In order to avoid a communication error, a method of communicating with the payout control device 92 and transmitting a command indicating that the setting is being changed may be adopted.

An advantage of adopting a method in which the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is not set and communication with the payout control device 92 is not performed is that it is not necessary to change the software of the payout control device 92.
It is also possible to prevent the game ball from being fired by resetting the firing permission signal.

In the present embodiment, the main command permission signal is described as a signal that can be independently set by the main control CPU 72 (main control device 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout control device 92). The command permission signal can be set only by the main control device 70, and can be a signal that cannot be set by the payout control device 92. In this case, the payout control device 92 uses the payout command permission signal (communication permission signal) instead of the main command permission signal. Then, when the payout control device 92 sets the payout command permission signal, the main control device 70 is in a state where the command can be transmitted to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 resets the payout command permission signal. As a result, the main control device 70 becomes unable to send a command to the payout control device 92.

Step S131a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H", "02H", or "03H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132 without executing step S131b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S131b.

Step S131b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a main command permission signal in a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state where a command can be transmitted to the main control device 70. As a result, the game ball can be paid out unless the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined prohibited state while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (during the execution of the setting-related process), so that the payout control device 92 can be set to the game ball. Prohibition processing that does not execute payout can be executed (prohibition processing execution means).

The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command (startup command) to the main control device 70, receives a start confirmation command for the payout start command, and is in a payout available state. Pay out the game ball based on the payout command sent.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 prohibits the payout start command from being transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 by setting a predetermined prohibition state. , It is possible to prohibit the payout control device 92 from being in a payable state and prevent the payout control device 92 from executing the payout of the game ball (prohibition processing execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal (communication permission signal) on the main control device 70 side to OFF (communication disallowance), thereby setting a predetermined prohibition state (communication disallowance). It can be set (a state in which the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is OFF) (prohibition processing execution means).

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal. The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state when the power is cut off.

The emission permission signal is set in a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76.

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop processing described later as a preliminary preparation for the interrupt processing. By performing this processing, it is possible to normally start the interrupt processing that occurs thereafter, and to continue the processing from the main loop processing after the interrupt processing is executed.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 starts executing the main loop process in step S135. As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop process from beginning to end.

When the setting function (setting changing device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the state at the time of turning on the power increases. At this time, by some operations, "normal recovery (recovery)", "RAM clear recovery (initialization)", "setting reference mode (see setting)", "setting change mode" (setting change mode), which is the state when the power is turned on, It is necessary to separate "setting change)".

In the present embodiment, in order to divide the state at the time of power-on into four, the transition determination is performed using two input devices such as the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

The conditions for transition to the four states are as follows.
(1) Normal recovery RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: OFF
(2) RAM clear return RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: OFF
(3) Setting reference mode RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: ON
(4) Setting change mode RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: ON

In this way, the four states can be separated by operating the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a command transmission timing of the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, the main control device 70 waits for [A01] 3.1 seconds, and [A02] determines the activation method.

Depending on the determination of the activation method, the main control device 70 is activated by [A03] initialization (RAM clear), [A04] restoration (recovery of backup information), or [A05] setting change. Or, it is started by [A06] setting reference.

Then, when the processing of [A03] initialization, [A04] power recovery, [A05] setting change, or [A06] setting reference is completed, the main control device 70 sets the [A07] main command permission signal to ON. [A08] Shift to a normal game. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, the command from the payout control device 92 can be received.

[Payout control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 waits for [B01] 0.1 seconds and executes [B02] power-on processing. In the power-on processing, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [B03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to the [B04] start command transmission waiting state. The start command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 is waiting for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and a command cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70 (). Command transmission impossible state to the main control device 70).

Then, when the main command permission signal is set to ON in the main control device 70 ([A07]), the payout control device 92 is in a state where a command can be transmitted to the main control device 70 (main control). The command can be transmitted to the device 70), [C01] The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command to the main control device 70.

Upon receiving the payout start command, the main control device 70 transmits a [C02] start confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command in response to the command.
As a result, the payout control device 92 shifts to the [B05] normal game state, and the game ball can be paid out.

Since the game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, it is desired to prohibit the command transmission from the payout control device 92.

In order to prohibit the command transmission from the payout control device 92 while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, the following method is adopted in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Payout start command (confirmation of payout operation permission)
(2) Error-related commands (errors related to payout (full tank error, failure error, etc.) are notified by the production control device)

The operation of the main control device 70 at the time of receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command (1) above, the main control device 70 returns a command (start confirmation command) for permitting the payout operation to the payout control device 92.
(4) After receiving the command in (2) above, an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Here, there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, but in the above (3), there is a possibility that the payout operation is performed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.
Therefore, in order not to perform the above (3), a method of using the "main command permission signal" and not transmitting the command is adopted.

The usage of the main command permission signal is as follows.
The payout control device 92 confirms the "main command permission signal" on the main control device 70 side before transmitting the command. The "main command permission signal" on the main control device 70 side is a signal indicating a command reception ready state of the main control device 70.
In the present embodiment, the "main command permission signal" is set to the off state on the main control device 70 side while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, so that the payout control device 92 does not transmit a command.

In the main control device 70, it is possible to make the payout impossible state only by setting the main command permission signal to OFF, and software modification is not required on the payout control device 92 side. Further, the main control device 70 side can be designed without considering the occurrence of command reception during setting change or setting reference.

13 and 14 are flowcharts showing an example of the second procedure of the CPU initialization process.
The difference between the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process and the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process is that steps S131 to S131b in FIG. 11 are changed to steps S181 to S181b in FIG. is there. The off-page connector has also been changed to B.
Therefore, in the following description, steps S181 to S181b of FIG. 14 will be described, and description of other points will be omitted.

Step S1811: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a main command permission signal (communication permission signal) in a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state where a command can be transmitted to the main control device 70.

Step S181a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H", "02H", or "03H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S181b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132.

Step S181b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a payout operation stop command. When the payout control device 92 receives the payout operation stop command, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game ball cannot be paid out. In this case, the payout control device 92 may shift to a state in which the command cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70.

The payout operation stop command is transmitted in the timer interrupt processing after shifting to the main loop processing.
The timer interrupt processing is executed even during the setting change or the setting change, but the processing route different from the normal game is executed. This point is the same in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The payout operation start command can be set in the power return initialization process (CPU initialization process) or the RAM clear initialization process (CPU initialization process).
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 executes step S132.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 is a payout operation stop command that prohibits the payout control device 92 from paying out the game ball while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (during the execution of the setting-related process). By transmitting (prohibition command), it is possible to execute a prohibition process that prevents the payout control device 92 from executing the payout of the game ball (prohibition process execution means).

The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command (start command) to the main control device 70, and receives a start confirmation command for the payout start command to shift from the non-payable state to the payable state, and the payout possible state. The game ball is paid out based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 shifts the payout control device 92 to the payout impossible state by transmitting the payout operation stop command (prohibition command) to the payout control device 92. It is possible to prevent the payout control device 92 from executing the payout of the game ball (prohibition processing execution means).

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a command transmission timing of a second procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The dotted line in the figure indicates the time when the timer interrupt is possible.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, the main control device 70 waits for [D01] 3.1 seconds, and [D02] determines the activation method.

Depending on the determination of the activation method, the main control device 70 may be activated by [D03] initialization (RAM clear) or by [D04] power recovery (recovery of backup information), and [D05] main command permission Set the signal to ON. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, the command from the payout control device 92 can be received.
Further, depending on the determination of the activation method, the main control device 70 may be activated by changing the [D06] setting or by referring to the [D07] setting.

Then, when the processing of [D03] initialization, [D04] power recovery, [D06] setting change, or [D07] setting reference is completed, the main control device 70 shifts to the [D08] normal game.

[D08] In the normal game, the main control device 70 is in a state where the timer interrupt process can be executed, and in the timer interrupt process, [D09] setting change, [D10] setting reference, or [D11] process related to the normal game is performed. Will be executed.

[Payout control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 waits for [E01] 0.1 seconds and executes [E02] power-on processing. In the power-on processing, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [E03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to the [E04] start command transmission waiting state. The start command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 is waiting for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and a command cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70 (). Command transmission impossible state to the main control device 70).

[F01] The main control device 70 confirms the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side, and when the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is set to ON, the payout control device 92 is referred to. And send a start command.

Then, when the main command permission signal is set to ON in the main control device 70 ([D05]), the payout control device 92 is in a state where a command can be transmitted to the main control device 70 (main control). The command can be transmitted to the device 70), [F02] The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command to the main control device 70. The order of sending the start command of [F01] and sending the payout start command of [F02] may change.

Upon receiving the payout start command, the main control device 70 transmits a [F03] start confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command in response to the command. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state where the game ball can be paid out.

[F04] When the main control device 70 is activated by changing the setting or referring to the setting ([D06] or [D07]), the main control device 70 transmits a payout operation stop command to the payout control device 92. As a result, the payout control device 92 becomes unable to pay out the game ball.

[F05] When the processing related to the setting change or the setting reference is completed, the main control device 70 transmits a payout operation start command to the payout control device 92. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state where the game ball can be paid out.
Then, the payout control device 92 shifts to the [E05] normal gaming state.

[E05] In the normal game, the payout control device 92 is in a state where the timer interrupt process can be executed, and in the timer interrupt process, [E06] waiting for payout permission or [E07] the process related to the normal game is executed.

[G01] The payout control device 92 is set so that the payout operation cannot be performed for 5 seconds after receiving the activation confirmation command. Therefore, by receiving the payout operation stop command during that time, the payout of the payout control device 92 is prohibited. That is, the payout is permitted for a moment, but since there is a weight of 5 seconds, the game ball is not paid out during this period. Then, since the payout operation stop command is transmitted before the 5-second weight is completed, the game ball is not paid out. Then, in this state, the setting change or the setting reference is executed. For the payout operation start command, a weight of 2 seconds is set after reception.

In this way, the payout control device 92 shifts from the non-payable state to the payable state after a certain period of time has elapsed (after 5 seconds have passed and after the time of G01 has elapsed) after receiving the activation confirmation command.
Then, the main control device 70 transmits a payout operation stop command (prohibition command) before a certain time elapses (before the elapse of 5 seconds, before the elapse of the G01 time) after the start confirmation command is transmitted, and the payout control device 92 Restricts the transition from the non-payable state to the payable state (prohibited processing execution means).

Since the game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, it is desired to prohibit the payout operation of the payout control device 92.

In order to prohibit the payout operation of the payout control device 92 while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, the following method is adopted in the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Payout start command (confirmation of payout operation permission)
(2) Error-related commands (The effect control device notifies you of errors related to payout)

The operation of the main control device 70 at the time of receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command (1) above, the main control device 70 returns a command (start confirmation command) for permitting the payout operation to the payout control device 92.
(4) After receiving the command of (1) above, an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Here, there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, but in the above (3), there is a possibility that the payout operation is performed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.
Therefore, after the activation confirmation command of (3) above is transmitted and before the game ball is actually paid out, a "setting change / reference start command" is transmitted to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 sends the game ball. Adopt a method to prevent payout.

The operation on the payout control device 92 side after receiving the setting change / reference start command is as follows.
The payout control device 92 that has received the setting change / reference start command is put into the payout stop state. The cancellation of the payout stop state is triggered by the setting change / reference end command.

Here, the "setting change / reference start command" and the "setting change / reference end command" may be prepared as new commands, but the "payout operation start command" and "payout operation stop command" may also be used. it can.
In this case, "setting change / reference start command" = "payout operation stop command", and "setting change / reference end command" = "payout operation start command".

As a result, it is possible to prevent unintended payout while changing the setting or referencing the setting, and by using the "payout operation start command" or the "payout operation stop command", it is not necessary to modify the software of the payout control device 92. ..

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the main loop processing. Each procedure will be described below.
In the main loop processing, while updating random numbers (stirring random numbers, etc.), the following three types of interrupts are waited for.
(1) Serial communication reception interrupt (when receiving a command from the payout control device)
(2) Timer interrupt (when the timer time is up once every 4 ms)
(3) Interruption when power is cut off (when input voltage drops due to power off)
Most of the processing related to the game is executed by the timer interrupt processing.

Step S1411: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt prohibition processing.
Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments the random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the winning type, a reach determination) other than a jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and a hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to a normal symbol are used. Random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) are generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target).

The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S142, the initial value update random number is updated. In this process, the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number is updated. The reason why step S142 is executed after disabling interrupts in step S141 is that the same processing is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), so that duplication (conflict) with this is prevented. Because. The big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and their update cycle is even faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). It is not necessary to update the initial values of the determined random number and the winning determined random number.

Step S143: The main control CPU 72 executes the main command analysis process. In this process, when there is a command from the payout control device 92 saved by the serial communication reception interrupt, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process is performed according to the result. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout start confirmation specification command to the payout command buffer when the received main command is the payout start designation command, while the received main command is not the payout start designation command. After checking whether the value is within the specified range (whether it is an appropriate value as the main command), if it is out of the range, the payout error specification command is output to the subcommand transmission buffer, and the payout radio wave is further determined according to the situation. Set the error flag.

Step S144: The main control CPU 72 executes the subcommand transmission process. In this process, when an untransmitted subcommand (effect command) remains in the subcommand transmission buffer, the main control CPU 72 sends the effect control device 124 to the subcommand stored in the subcommand transmission buffer. To send.

Step S145: The main control CPU 72 executes the performance display monitor aggregation / division process. This process is a process outside the region. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating the base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200. In this process, the main control CPU 72 uses the division task to determine the number of prize balls paid out by the game balls entering each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening). The base is calculated by dividing by the number of outs (the number of game balls detected by the out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired in the area (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means). The performance display monitor aggregation division process is a base-related process.

The base-related process is a process related to control of the base, and includes at least one of a base calculation process executed when calculating the base and a base display process executed when displaying the base on the performance display monitor 200.

Here, it is not necessary to clearly distinguish between the base calculation process and the base display process, the process focusing on the base calculation is the base calculation process, and the process focusing on the base display is the base display. It is a process. Therefore, a part of the base calculation process may be regarded as a part of the base display process, and a part of the base display process may be regarded as a part of the base calculation process.
The details of the performance display monitor aggregation division processing will be described later.

Step S146, Step S147: The main control CPU 72 permits interrupts and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers.

Then, these series of processes are performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during the execution of the main loop process and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a serial communication reception interrupt occurs.
When a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes serial communication reception interrupt processing (step S136). The serial communication reception interrupt is generated when a command is received from the payout control device 92.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a timer interrupt occurs.
When a timer interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (step S137). The timer interrupt occurs when the timer time is up once in the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms).

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when an interrupt occurs at the time of power failure notification.
When an interrupt at the time of power off warning occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes interrupt processing at the time of power off notification (step S138). The interrupt when the power is turned off is generated when the input voltage drops due to the power cut.

The interrupt priority is "high" for "serial communication reception interrupt", "medium" for "timer interrupt", and "low" for "interrupt when power is cut off".
Therefore, if a "serial communication receive interrupt" occurs while a "timer interrupt" is generated and the "timer interrupt processing" is being executed, the "serial communication reception interrupt processing" is performed unless the interrupt is disabled. To execute.
On the other hand, even if a "timer interrupt" occurs and "timer interrupt processing" is being executed, even if a "power interruption warning" occurs, "power interruption warning processing" is executed at that time. Instead, the "interrupt processing at the time of power failure notification" is executed after the "timer interrupt processing" is completed.

When various interrupt processing such as serial communication reception interrupt processing (main command reception interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing is completed, the interrupt source (program address indicated by the stack pointer) is restored.
Since the interrupt processing at the time of power cut notification is a special process, it does not return to the interrupt source in principle. Normally, after performing evacuation processing (calculation of checksum, RWM (RAM) access protection, etc.), a reset occurrence due to a voltage drop is waited on the spot. If the power supply is restored in the middle, the process returns to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing). Note that the interrupt source may be returned at the beginning of the process, but this is an exceptional process.

[Serial communication reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of serial communication reception interrupt processing.
The serial communication reception interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92. The payout control device 92 transmits a command for specifying payout activation indicating that it has been activated to the main control device 70, and various devices (for example, the payout device board 100 and the like) related to payout of prize balls as the game progresses. A command (error command, etc.) transmitted from the full tank switch 161 or the like to the main control device 70 is relay-transmitted. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes serial communication reception interrupt processing (SCU interrupt processing) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of serial communication reception interrupt processing will be described later.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop process in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved during execution of the data reception interrupt processing.

Step S182: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a reception error. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO), and if there is data, whether or not the data is normal. Check if. Then, when there is no data, or when there is data but the data is not normal, the main control CPU 72 determines that a reception error has occurred.

If it is determined that a reception error has occurred (Yes), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S184. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no reception error (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S184.

Step S184: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of storing a receive command (main command) in a buffer (receive command buffer). The saved main command is analyzed by the main command analysis process of the main loop process.

This process is a process of rewriting the buffer of the used area of the RAM 76. For this reason, if a serial communication reception interrupt occurs while processing related to the outside of the area is being executed, the buffer of the used area will be rewritten even though the processing related to the outside of the area is being executed. There is a possibility of violating the game machine rules.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the serial communication reception interrupt processing is executed, the serial communication reception interrupt processing is executed after the interrupt is disabled (after the serial communication reception interrupt is prohibited).

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, permits interrupts, and then ends serial communication reception interrupt processing and main loop processing (FIG. 16). ) Returns to the interrupt source.

[Interrupt processing when power is cut off]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for interrupt processing at the time of power failure notification.
The interrupt process at the time of power cutoff is executed when the power supply is cut off (hereinafter, abbreviated as "power cutoff").
In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power failure and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller (not shown)). This monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt processing (XINT interrupt processing) at the time of power interruption notification, triggered by input of a power supply cutoff warning signal (XINT interrupt) to the XINT terminal.

Steps S151 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power failure detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected. If it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 ends the interrupt processing at the time of power cutoff warning and returns to the interrupt source of the main loop processing (FIG. 16). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S153.

Step S153: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing all output ports. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to a test signal terminal and a command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, and the second special winning opening solenoid 97. Clear the output port buffer.

The process of step S153 is a process executed when it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S152, or when the setting change is completed (by executing step S330 of FIG. 27).

Step S154: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating and saving the checksum. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the backup target area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup flag and the checksum buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. Then, when the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed, the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the checksum buffer.

Step S155: The main control CPU 72 stores a valid value (for example, “01”) in the backup flag area.

Step S156: The main control CPU 72 executes a RAM (RWM) access prohibition process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 stores "00H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the used area and the outside of the area) of the RAM 76.

Step S157: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been detected. The method of confirming the power cutoff warning signal is the same as the method in step S152 described above.
When it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S157 again. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S158.

Step S158: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms) has elapsed in a state (off state) in which the power off warning signal is not detected. When it is confirmed that the predetermined time has elapsed without detecting the power off warning signal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the beginning of the program. Since a program related to the CPU initialization process is arranged at the beginning of the program, returning to the beginning of the program means executing the CPU initialization process. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the predetermined time has elapsed without detecting the power off warning signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S157 and repeatedly executes the previous processes. By executing such processing, when the power supply is restored (the power cutoff warning signal is turned off for 10 ms continuously), it is possible to return to the beginning of the program for interrupt processing at the time of power cutoff notice.

Further, the processes of steps S157 and S158 are standby processes executed in preparation for shutting off the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power off warning signal is continuously detected, step S157 and step S158 are repeatedly executed, so that the standby state is continued as long as the power supply is sustained. In this way, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters the standby state, and in a situation where the power supply is being cut off, other The standby state is maintained without executing any processing, and the upcoming power supply is cut off in a safe state (waiting for reset due to voltage drop).

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Since the main control device 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown) after a power failure occurs, the main control device 70 is a backup target of the RAM 76. The contents of the memory are retained without being lost even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when a power failure occurs after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous CPU initialization process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of timer interrupt processing.
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (PTC interrupt processing) at predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of timer interrupt processing will be described later.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the values of the AF register (accumulator and flag register pair), BC, DE, and HL register (general purpose register pair) used during the execution of the main loop processing to the save area of the RAM 76. Evacuate to. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved while the timer interrupt processing is being executed.

Step S201: The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt flag initialization process. In this process, a process of clearing the timer interrupt flag (= 0) is executed. The reason for clearing the timer interrupt flag is that the timer interrupt occurs in a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms), but the timer interrupt flag is set (= 1) in the predetermined timer interrupt cycle. When the timer interrupt flag is set, the timer interrupt is not allowed to occur.

Step S201a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt enable process. By allowing interrupts here, it is possible to generate other interrupts while executing the next and subsequent steps of timer interrupt processing.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 and the performance display monitor 200 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. Specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 outputs the generated common output data to the port output buffer for the common corresponding to the selected common. The output content is the content set in the previous timer interrupt.

Here, the data output to the port output buffer for each common is sequentially port-output by one common in this dynamic port output processing each time the timer interrupt processing occurs. For example, in the timer interrupt processing executed next time, the data stored for common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt processing executed one after another, the data stored for common 2 is output to the port. The data stored in the port output buffer for each common is processed one by one in order. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game status display, etc.) and a performance display monitor are sequentially driven in a common unit, and a dynamic lighting method is used. The lighting is controlled by.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the port input process. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 logics the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 and the inversion result values of the previous input values. Store the product in the input port-on detection flag. As a result, the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag makes it possible to grasp the accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals. Various switch signals include a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, a second count switch 85, a first winning opening switch 86, and a first. 2. The winning detection signal from the winning port switch 81, the detection signal from the fraud detection switch (magnetic detection switch, radio wave detection switch, vibration detection switch, etc.) (not shown) and the like are included.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes various timers used for the game (timers that manage the fluctuation time / stop time of the symbol, the opening time / closing time of the electric accessory), various timers for external information, and security signals. Executes processing (subtraction processing, etc.) to update counters such as timers.

Step S205: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value random number update process. The content of the process is the same as the initial value random number update process (step S142 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the hit symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S206a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H", "02H", or "03H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S206b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S207.

The reason for executing such a determination process is to prevent the process related to the normal game from being executed when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. Then, the load on the program of the main control device 70 can be reduced by not executing the process related to the normal game in the timer interrupt process while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.

Step S206b: The main control CPU 72 executes the setting change process. By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when the setting is changed or a setting reference process executed when the setting is referenced. Can be done (setting-related processing execution means). The details of the processing will be described later. The setting-related processing includes processing executed during setting change or setting reference. Then, when the setting change process is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes step S217a. The reason for shifting to step S217a is to output an external signal (security signal) in the external information management process.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 may restrict the execution of at least a part of the other process during the execution of one of the setting-related process and the base-related process. Yes (restriction means). That is, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (step S206a; Yes), the main control CPU 72 does not execute at least a part of the base-related processing (steps S207 to S217, particularly step S208). can do.

Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes the switch management process. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S203), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 , The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, and the processing corresponding to each occurrence event is executed. The details of the processing will be described later.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes the addition number calculation process (base-related process execution means). The addition number calculation process is a base-related process. This process is a process of the used area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the game state and each switch (out switch 99, middle start winning opening switch 80, right starting winning opening switch 82, first winning opening switch 86, second winning opening switch 81, first Check the status of the count switch 84, the second count switch 85, etc.), and for the base calculation, "value to be added to the RAM outside the area (the number of prize balls generated during 4 ms, the number of outs, etc.)" Is calculated. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the values of the number of launched balls A (normal out addition number), the launch ball number B (total out addition number), and the acquired ball number (normal prize ball addition number). To do. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S209, Step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game management process and the normal game management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1.

In the special game management process (step S209), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or controls the execution of the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device. The fluctuation display and the stop display by 35 are determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the processing will be described later.

Further, in the normal game management process (step S210), the main control CPU 72 determines the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (normal symbol hit determination random number) acquired in the previous switch management process (step S207) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and in this normal game management process. A random number value is read from the memory, and it is determined whether or not the value falls within a predetermined hit range. When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation. On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a disengaged manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes the state management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is collected to an abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entered into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and a base abnormality (to the back side of the game board unit 8). An error state such as the number of game balls, that is, the total number of winning balls in each of the winning openings 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, and 31b is larger than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). Check if it has occurred. When an error state is detected, the main control CPU 72 has caused an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer of the amusement park and by transmitting a predetermined error command to the effect control device 124. Notify. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may execute error processing related to door opening and fraud detection (magnet, radio wave, vibration, etc.).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S203) is ON, The prize ball control counters for each target are added by 1 and updated.

Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is not empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and if it is not empty (the payout command is set), the payout command is set. Various payout commands output to the buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, a payout command indicating a start mode at power-on is set in the process of CPU initialization, output to a payout command buffer, and a payout command indicating this start mode is transmitted in this process. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to the process for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball designation payout command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, a prize ball designation payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter is transmitted in this process. In the transmission of the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFO) is a predetermined number. It is executed when it is less than (more specifically, when the payout command set in the transmission FIFO has been transmitted or is currently being transmitted and the transmission FIFO has a vacancy).

Further, especially when the power is turned on, when the payout command set in the process of CPU initialization processing is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch permission signal with this as an opportunity. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the emission permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and the launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the payout control management process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the first profit (for example, 15 game balls) is obtained. Generate the corresponding prize ball content command. Note that generating a command means storing the command in a buffer for sending a subcommand (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, the winning ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for example, 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls that can be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. When the conditions are satisfied, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes the test signal management process. This process can be a process outside the region. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation state, big hit, small hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time reduction function operating, etc. ) Is generated, and these are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S216: The main control CPU 72 executes the LED display setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special. A process of generating common output data for controlling the lighting of the LEDs included in the symbol operation storage lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like is executed. The process related to the performance display monitor 200 is executed in the performance display monitor control process.

More specifically, the main control CPU 72 is based on a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, and the like determined in the special game management process (step S209) and the normal game management process (step S210). Therefore, a drive signal for lighting each lamp in the corresponding manner is generated as common output data.

Step S217: The main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid data setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first grand prize opening solenoid 90, and the second grand prize generated in the special game management process (step S209), the normal game management process (step S210), and the like. Each drive signal, test signal, etc. of the port solenoid 97 are combined (combined) and stored in the port output buffer. After that, the main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid data port output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs the port. For example, each drive signal of each solenoid 88, 90, 97 stored in the port output buffer is output to the port. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoids 88, 90, 97, and each solenoid executes an operation according to the drive signal.

Step S217a: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the external information management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends an external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port information, security signal, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. In the port output request buffer.
In the external information management process, an external signal (security signal) is output when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information management process, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5".

Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt prohibition processing.

Step S218a: The main control CPU 72 executes the register save process.

Step S219: The main control CPU 72 executes the performance display monitor control process (base-related process execution means). The performance display monitor control process is a base-related process. This process is a process outside the area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process such as switching the display contents of the performance display monitor 200, or a base value calculated in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S145 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process. Is generated as common output data for displaying the drive signal on the performance display monitor 200. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S219a: The main control CPU 72 executes the register return process. As a result, the value of the register saved in the process of step S218a is restored.

Step S220: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt enable processing. By allowing interrupts here, it is possible to generate other interrupts while executing the next and subsequent steps of timer interrupt processing. As described above, multiple interrupts are permitted for timer interrupt processing.
The interrupt controller 192 executes the reception of interrupt request signals, priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like.

Step S221: The main control CPU 72 executes the firing position management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the launch position of the game ball according to the progress of the game (launch position determining means). Note that this process may be executed in the special game management process. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 returns the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, ends the timer interrupt processing, and returns to the main loop processing of the CPU initialization processing.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
In the main control device 70, during execution of the CPU initialization process, which is the main control program, an XINT interrupt (an interrupt request output by the parallel I / O port 79 that is the source of the interrupt process at the time of power failure notification) and an SCU interrupt. (Interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 which is the source of the serial communication reception interrupt process) and PTC interrupt (interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194 which is the source of the timer interrupt process) may occur. These interrupt requests are managed and controlled by the interrupt controller 192 mounted on the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 performs control (so-called masqueradable interrupt control) in which the interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72 permits the reception of the interrupt request, and the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction) prohibits the reception of the interrupt request. ing.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent generation factors having no interdependence, it is naturally conceivable that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to a predetermined priority of the interrupt request in consideration of the importance of interrupt processing, processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the priority of XINT interrupt (interrupt processing at the time of power failure notification) is the lowest, and that of PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing). The priority is the next highest, and the priority of the SCU interrupt (serial communication reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest (see FIGS. 17 to 19).

By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process, the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. Actually, if any interrupt request occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop process, the interrupt controller 192 receives the interrupt request. Control is performed based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when the XINT interrupt and the PTC interrupt are received at the same time, the PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing) having a higher priority is processed first. While the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in an interrupt waiting state, and after the timer interrupt processing is completed, the XINT interrupt (interrupt processing at the time of power failure warning) is executed.

By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this way, the interrupt controller 192 enables execution of multiple interrupts in the main controller 70.

[Dynamic port output processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the dynamic port output processing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S160: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the output port 0. As a result, the display on the main display is cleared. Output port 0 is a port that outputs data related to the main display.

Step S161: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the output port 2. As a result, the display of the performance display monitor 200 is cleared. The output port 2 is a port that outputs data related to the performance display monitor 200.

The reason for executing the processes of steps S160 and S161 is that in the case of the dynamic lighting method, if the display is not erased, the control process may run out of control when referring to the common data.

After the processing of step S160 and step S161, the processing of waiting for the end of the blanking time can be executed. Due to this waiting time, the display data can be erased and the data can be output after a certain period of time has elapsed. This waiting time is also a waiting time for avoiding the runaway of the control process. During this waiting time, the following processes of step S162 and step S163 may be executed.

Step S162: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the common counter in the range of 0 to 3. As a result, the common number of the output target is updated.

Step S163: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of acquiring common data corresponding to the common counter. As a result, the data corresponding to the common output target can be acquired.

Step S164: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting common data to the output port 1. By outputting the common data to the output port 1, the common data can be output while switching the common. The output port 1 is a port that outputs data that specifies a common number (common 0 to 3) corresponding to a common counter.

Step S165: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of acquiring display data corresponding to the common counter. The display data is stored in the RAM of the used area.

The display data to be acquired is roughly divided into two types, the first data is the data for the main display and the second data is the data for the performance display monitor 200.

The data for the first main display is generated as common output data in the LED display setting process (FIG. 61).

The data for the second performance display monitor 200 may be generated as data for displaying the base in the performance display monitor display process (step S646) of the performance display monitor control process (FIG. 65), and the setting is changed. It may be generated as data for displaying the set value in steps S334 to S346 of the process (FIG. 28).

Here, regarding the data for the second performance display monitor 200, since the display data is set in the common common 0 to 3 buffers both when displaying the base and when displaying the set value, the past The data will be overwritten.

The process of step S169 of FIG. 23 and the process of step S173 of FIG. 24 are the same process as the process, but when the process of step S169 of FIG. 23 is executed, the common commons 0 to 3 are executed. Since the data related to the set value is stored in the buffer, the content related to the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200. On the other hand, when the process of step S173 in FIG. 24 is executed, since the data related to the base is stored in the common common 0 to 3 buffers, the content related to the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H", "02H", or "03H".

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S167a. On the other hand, if it can be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S169.

Step S167a: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting to the output port 0. Specifically, the process of setting the display of the main display is executed. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is the common output data generated by the LED display setting process, and each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 by setting the common output data in the common port output buffer. The lighting of the can be controlled by the dynamic lighting method.

Step S167b: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt prohibition processing.
Step S167c: The main control CPU 72 executes the register save process.

Step S168a: The main control CPU 72 executes the performance display monitor output process (base-related process execution means). The performance display monitor output process is a base-related process. This process is a process outside the area. Therefore, this process is executed after the interrupt prohibition process is executed. By executing this process, the data specified by the specified common is output. The details of the processing will be described later.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute a process of displaying the base on the performance display monitor 200 (base-related process) as a process included in the process outside the area (second process). Yes (second processing execution means).

Step S168b: The main control CPU 72 executes the register return process.
Step S168c: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt enable processing.

Step S169: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting to the output port 2. Specifically, a process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (a process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 to the output port 2) is executed. This process is a process of the used area. By executing this process, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. The processing other than the processing in step S168a can be the processing of the used area.

By executing such a process, the buffer contents of the used area can be output to the main display and the buffer contents outside the area can be output to the performance display monitor 200 during the normal game. On the other hand, while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, the buffer contents of the used area can be output to the performance display monitor 200, and all the main indicators can be cleared so that nothing is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1, there is a case where the 7-segment LED does not exist in the main display (a case where a plurality of dot LEDs are geometrically arranged). In such a situation, in order to display the set value in an easy-to-understand manner, it is necessary to use the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor 200. At this time, there is a regular concern that the processing is performed outside the area (concern that the processing is not performed in the used area even though the processing is related to the game).

Since the processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is permitted to be executed outside the area, basically, the display processing of the performance display monitor 200 is executed outside the area.
However, among the display processes of the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor, the process of displaying the set value may correspond to the process related to the game, so the process is executed in the used area.

As a result, the process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed in the used area, and regular concerns can be avoided.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute a process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor 200 as a process included in the process of the used area (first process) (first process). Processing execution means).

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[Performance display monitor output processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the performance display monitor output processing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 executes the stack pointer save process. By this process, the stack pointer of the used area is saved.

Step S171: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a stack pointer outside the area.

Step S172: The main control CPU 72 executes the register save process. To save the register, use the stack pointer outside the area.

Step S173: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting data.
Specifically, a process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (a process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 of FIG. 23 to the output port 2) is executed. By executing this process, the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 during the normal game.

This process is the same as step S169 in FIG. 23, but the content of the data output to the output port 2 (content displayed on the performance display monitor 200) is different.
In this process (step S173), since the data related to the base is acquired in step S165 of FIG. 23, the data related to the base is output to the output port 2, and the content related to the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
On the other hand, in step S169 of FIG. 23, since the data related to the set value is acquired in step S165 of FIG. 23, the data related to the set value is output to the output port 2, and the content related to the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200. ..

Since the common output is executed in the process related to the used area (to use the common common number; see step S164 in FIG. 23), in this process, only the data is output. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is the common output data generated by the performance display monitor display processing, and by setting the common output data (base display data) in the common port output buffer, the performance display monitor The lighting of each lamp mounted on the 200 can be controlled by a dynamic lighting method.

Specifically, the main control CPU 72 switches either the previous base or the current base together with the corresponding identifiers “bL.” Or “b6.” At preset intervals to display the performance display monitor 200. Executes the process of setting the common output data for display in the port output buffer. The display content on the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the common output data (drive signal) set here.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 executes the register return process.

Step S167: The main control CPU 72 executes the stack pointer return process. By executing this process, after returning to the stack pointer of the used area, the process returns to the used area.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the dynamic port output processing (FIG. 23).

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing.
The timer interrupt is an interrupt having a lower interrupt priority than the serial communication receive interrupt (see FIGS. 17 to 19).
Here, the bold dotted arrows in the figure indicate the interrupt disabled section (dotted arrows A1 to A3), and the bold solid line arrows in the figure indicate the interrupt permitted section (solid arrows B1 to B3).

In the timer interrupt process, first, the register save process (S200) and the interrupt flag initialization process (S201) are executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see the dotted arrow A1).

When an interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 (program, assembler) of the present embodiment automatically enters the same state as when the instruction to disable interrupt is used. Therefore, when the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is disabled internally (as hardware). Therefore, in order to allow interrupts, it is necessary to execute interrupt enable processing.

Therefore, in the timer interrupt process, the interrupt enable process (S201a) is next executed. By executing this process, the interrupt enable section is started (see the solid line arrow B1).

When the dynamic port output process (S202) is called from the timer interrupt process, the dynamic port output process executes a process of clearing the output port 0, a process of clearing the output port 2, and the like (S160, S161). This section is an interrupt enabled section (see solid arrow B1).

In the dynamic port output process, the interrupt disable process (S167b) is then executed. By executing this process, the interrupt disabled section is started (see the dotted arrow A2).

In the dynamic port output process, the register save process (S167c), the performance display monitor output process (S168a), and the register return process (S168b) are further executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see the dotted arrow A2).

In the dynamic port output process, the interrupt enable process (S168c) is finally executed. By executing this process, the interrupt enable section is started (see the solid line arrow B2).

The dynamic port output processing returns to the timer interrupt processing, and various processing is executed. This section is an interrupt enabled section (see solid arrow B2).

In the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable process (S218) is then executed. By executing this process, the interrupt disabled section is started (see the dotted arrow A3).
In the timer interrupt process, register save process (S218a), performance display monitor control process (S219), and register return process (S219a) are further executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see the dotted arrow A3).

Then, in the timer interrupt process, the interrupt enable process (S220) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt enable section is started (see solid arrow B3).

As described above, in the present embodiment, since "serial communication reception interrupt processing" having a higher interrupt priority than "timer interrupt processing" is set, "performance display monitor control processing (S219)" and "performance display monitor output" are set. In the process (S165), the process is executed after the interrupt is disabled.

Therefore, during the execution of "performance display monitor control processing (S219)" and "performance display monitor output processing (S165)", even if a "serial communication reception interrupt" having a high interrupt priority occurs, it is not interrupted. The "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)" are continuously executed.
In this case, the "performance display monitor control process" and the "performance display monitor output process" are completed, and the "serial communication reception interrupt process" is executed at the timing when the interrupt is permitted. Since the received data related to the interrupt is stored in the receive buffer, even if the timing of fetching the received data is delayed, the process related to the received data is executed after that, so that no problem occurs.

[Processing content of main control CPU 72]
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (first processing) (first processing execution means). Further, when a serial communication receive interrupt (predetermined interrupt) occurs during execution of the timer interrupt processing, the main control CPU 72 interrupts the execution of the timer interrupt processing and performs serial communication reception interrupt processing (separate from the timer interrupt processing). The second process) is executed (second process execution means).

The timer interrupt process (first process) includes an interrupt enable process that permits the serial communication receive interrupt and an interrupt disallow process that monitors the exit history and does not allow the serial communication receive interrupt.

The interrupt permission process is a process related to the used area, for example, a process (special game management process, etc.) excluding the “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and the “performance display monitor output process (S165)”.
The interrupt non-permission process is a process related to the outside of the area, for example, “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and “performance display monitor output process (S165)”.

When executing the interrupt disallowed process, the main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt disallowed process in a state where the serial communication reception interrupt is disabled (first process executing means).

Further, when the main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt disallowed processing, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of disabling the serial communication reception interrupt before executing the interrupt disallowed process, executes the interrupt disallowed process, and performs the interrupt disallowed process. After execution, a process that allows serial communication receive interrupts is executed (first process execution means).

The interrupt non-permission process is a part of the process for calculating the base. Some of the processes for calculating the base are "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and "performance display monitor output process (S165)".

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modified form of timer interrupt processing.
Although the timer interrupt processing has been described in the order of the processing shown in FIG. 22, it can be modified as follows.

The processing order of the timer interrupt processing is as follows: [1] dynamic port output processing, [2] addition number calculation processing (at least prize detection and prize ball number calculation), and [3] performance display monitor control processing.

[1] The reason why the dynamic port output processing is given the highest priority is to make the common switching timing and the data display time constant. Therefore, [1] dynamic port output processing is performed in the first half (early stage) of timer interrupt processing.

[2] The reason why the addition number calculation process is given the next priority is that the addition number calculation process is performed in the performance display monitor control process because the number of prize balls and the number of outs to be used are calculated in advance within the usage area. This is because it needs to be performed before the display monitor control process.

[3] The reason why the performance display monitor control process is set as the final priority is that the performance display monitor control process needs to be executed after the completion of the addition number calculation process.

The process of inserting into [A], [B] or [C] in the figure is not limited to the arrangement example of FIG. 22, and is an arbitrary process (input port update process, input port edge detection process, winning opening). Judgment processing, processing related to special symbols, processing related to ordinary symbols, processing related to errors, processing related to external output, processing related to test signal output, port output processing, etc.) can be inserted.

At this time, the calculated base value differs depending on whether the processing related to the special symbol (special game management processing) is performed before or after the addition number calculation processing. The reason for this is that since it is determined whether or not a jackpot is being hit in the addition number calculation process, there are cases where the number of outs, which is the denominator of the base value, is counted and cases where it is not counted.

Specifically, if the processing related to the special symbol is before the addition number calculation processing, the processing related to the special symbol becomes a big hit within one interrupt, and if the out switch is detected, it is out. It does not count the number (outswitch detection is excluded from the base calculation as it is considered a jackpot).

On the other hand, when the processing related to the special symbol is after the addition number calculation processing, the number of outs is counted when the processing related to the special symbol is a big hit and the out switch is detected within one interrupt. (Because it has not been a big hit yet at the time of the addition number calculation process, outswitch detection is valid and is not excluded from the base calculation).

In this way, the base value changes depending on whether the processing related to the special symbol is arranged before or after the addition number calculation processing, but the processing related to the special symbol is the game specification or the base to be calculated. It can be placed at any place in the timer interrupt processing according to the contents of.

27 and 28 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the setting change process.
Step S300: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the set value buffer. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can acquire the current set value.

Step S302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and the setting has not been finalized. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting is not confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S304. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting has not been finalized (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

Step S304: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed. In this embodiment, since the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used, the pressing of the RAM clear switch 304 is confirmed here, but the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used. If the setting change switch is provided separately, it is confirmed whether or not the setting change switch is pressed in this process.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S306. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

Step S306: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the set value. For example, when the set value loaded in step S300 is "0 (setting 1)", when this process is executed, the set value becomes "1 (setting 2)". Further, when the set value loaded in step S300 is "1 (setting 2)", when this process is executed, the set value becomes "2 (setting 3)". If the set value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", when this process is executed, the set value returns to the original value and becomes "0 (setting 1)".

Here, when the set value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", by executing this process, the set value is set to "6 (out of range)" without returning to the original value, and the next In step S308 and step S310, a process of correcting to "0 (setting 1)" may be performed.

Step S308: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the set value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)”. This process is a process for avoiding setting an unintended setting value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the set value is in the range of "0 (setting 1)" to "5 (setting 6)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S312. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the set value is in the range of "0 (setting 1)" to "5 (setting 6)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S310.

Step S310: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “0 (setting 1)”. As a result, "0 (setting 1)" can be set when an unintended setting value is set.

Step S312: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and the setting has not been finalized. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting is not confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting has not been confirmed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S322 (in-page combiner 1 → 1).

Step S312: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting key has changed from ON to OFF. When the input signal from the setting key switch 302 changes from ON to OFF, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF.
The determination process may be a determination process for determining whether the setting key (setting key switch 302) is OFF.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S316. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (off-page combiner C → C).

Step S316: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "02H (during setting change / after confirmation)" in the setting changing flag.

Step S318: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a “setting confirmation designation command” as a subcommand. The "setting confirmation specification command" can include information that the setting has been confirmed and information on the setting value.

Step S320: The main control CPU 72 executes the subcommand set process. By executing this process, the "setting confirmation specification command" is set in the subcommand transmission buffer. The set "setting confirmation designation command" is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S332 (in-page combiner 2 → 2).

Step S322: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S332 (in-page combiner 2 → 2). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S324.

Step S324: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the inner frame closing timer.
In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the inner frame closing timer when the inner frame (for example, the inner frame assembly 7) is closed, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time. To do.

Step S324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the inner frame closing timer has timed up. Specifically, if the value of the inner frame closing timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has not timed up (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (out-of-page coupler C → C).

After that, when the value of the inner frame closing timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has timed up (Yes), and executes step S328.

Step S328: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the setting changing flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "0" in the setting changing flag.

Step S330: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of shifting to the process when the setting change is completed. Specifically, the process of shifting to step S152a (step S153) of FIG. 21 is executed by the jump instruction (off-page combiner "shift to process when setting change is completed" → "when setting change is completed").

By executing such a process, when the setting change and the setting reference are completed, the reset state is entered. Specifically, it jumps to the evacuation process when the power is turned off. Then, at the jump destination, after the checksum calculation, the power supply is confirmed, and the program returns to the beginning (CPU initialization process). As a result, the configuration of the program becomes "initialization-> setting change or setting reference (temporary main loop)-> initialization after setting change-> original main loop", but "initialization-> main loop (normal game, normal game, It can be simplified as "Setting change and setting reference)".

Here, when adding a setting function (setting change device 300) to the pachinko machine 1, the processing at power-on is (1) initialization processing, (2) main loop processing during setting change, and (3) setting. It is necessary to configure the configuration to reinitialize after the change (clearing the display, reclearing the RAM, shifting to the normal game, etc.), and (4) main loop processing during the game.
In this way, when the setting function is added, in addition to the setting change processing itself, processing before and after the setting change processing is required, so that the amount of program code increases significantly.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing at the time of power-on (at least a part of the CPU initialization processing) and the evacuation processing at the time of power-off notice (at least a part of the power-off warning interrupt processing) are performed. It is also used as a process after the setting change is completed.

Specifically, in the setting change processing called during the timer interrupt, when the end condition of the setting change or the setting reference is satisfied, the timer interrupt processing is not returned and the evacuation processing at the time of power cut notification (interrupt processing at the time of power cut notification). (In the middle of).

In the save process when the power is turned off, all output ports are cleared, the checksum is calculated and saved, and since the power remains ON after that, the program returns to the beginning (CPU initialization process) and the power is restored. It shifts to the normal game state through the same initialization process as above.

In this way, by combining the processing when the power is turned on and the evacuation processing when the power is turned off, the processing after the setting change is completed is compared with the case where the processing after the setting change is performed by a dedicated program. The amount of increase can be suppressed.

Step S332: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the inner frame closing timer. Then, when this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S334 (out-of-page combiner C → C).

Step S334: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the display data “rn.” In the common 0, 1 buffer.

Step S336: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and the setting is not finalized. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting is not confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S338. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed and the setting has not been finalized (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S340.

Step S338: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting data corresponding to “−” as display data in the common 2 buffer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S342.

Step S340: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting data corresponding to “blank (non-display)” as display data in the common 2 buffer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S342.

Step S342: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the set value buffer. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can acquire the set value after the setting is changed.

Step S344: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of converting the set value into display data.

Step S346: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the display data converted by the process of step S344 as display data in the common 3 buffer.

For example, when the set value is "5 (setting 6)", the setting is being changed, and the setting has not been confirmed, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 are displayed in order from the left side with "r". "N." "-" "6" is displayed. If the set value is "0 (setting 1)", the setting is being changed, and the setting is not confirmed, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 are displayed with "r" in order from the left side. "N.", "Blank (hidden)", and "1" are displayed.

That is, the display modes "r", "n.", "-", And "set value" of the performance display monitor 200 are the display modes (first display mode) during the setting change, and the "r", "n." The display modes of "n.", "blank (non-display)", and "set value" are the display modes (second display mode) during the setting reference.

By executing such a process, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value in different display modes depending on whether the setting is being changed or the setting value is being referenced, and when the setting value is displayed, the performance display monitor 200 is based. Can be hidden.

Further, by executing such a process, the performance display monitor 200 can display the set value or the base, that is, the main control CPU 72 causes the performance display monitor 200 to display the set value or the base. It is possible to prevent the base from being displayed when the performance display monitor 200 is displaying the set value and not to display the set value when the performance display monitor 200 is displaying the base.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[Switch management process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch management process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one number of first special symbol operation memories. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. The lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled based on the value of the counter added here.

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The reading of the random number storage area is in the FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When it is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous operation memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and the current operation memory number is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing (memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter also represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 30), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled based on the value of the counter added here.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (memory means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 30) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), so here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol (memory number notification means). .. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 30 and step S46 in FIG. 31) (first determination). Execution means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. The contents of the process will be described below according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is set according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1 (winning probability according to the set value). Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process after executing the determination result management process in step S82, and calls the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 29) or the second special symbol. The process returns to the memory update process (FIG. 30). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and if the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this corresponds to "one of the probabilistic symbols", the probability state is planned. For example, "A0H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this random number corresponds to "one of the normal symbols", the probability state is planned. For example, "01H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The comparison value for low probability is also set according to the winning probability (winning probability according to the set value) at low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is set according to the high-probability winning probability (winning probability according to the set value) in the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-mentioned pre-determination process (step S80) of the variation pattern information at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 above, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to the "probability variation symbol" or the "normal symbol". The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a "normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents the "probability variation symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "normal symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "probability variation symbol". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. As described above, the probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. .. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above, and conversely, the previous judgment result immediately before. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high-probability schedule ( No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 30) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 31).

[Special game management process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special game management process.
The special game management process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. The configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) for the management process (step S5000) and the small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be described along with each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is generated for each segment and dots (Nos. 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is generated for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, until the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 counts the number of balls entered for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls). ), It is excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 15 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). .. During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is called a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 15 times in total, these are called "15 rounds". May be generically referred to.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortening state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (probability fluctuation function activation flag, time reduction function activation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high probability as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most of the winnings in the first big winning opening occur. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for example, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "11 round probability variation jackpot 1-11"
(2) "15 rounds probability variation jackpot 1-6"
(3) "8 round probability change jackpot"
(4) "6 round probability change jackpot"
(5) "11 rounds normal jackpot"
(6) "3 round probability change jackpot"
(7) "5 round probability change jackpot"
(8) "5 rounds normal jackpot"

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "11 round probability variation jackpot 1 to 11" corresponds to the jackpot of "11 round probability variation symbol 1 to 11", and "11 round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of "11 round normal symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the eleventh round. When it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", it shifts to the "high probability time reduction state" by operating the "probability fluctuation function" and the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game.

Here, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 does not have to wait for the longest opening time to elapse. It will be closed.

[15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 or the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the 15th round. When it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7", it shifts to the "high probability time reduction state" by activating the "probability fluctuation function" and the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game.

[8 round probability variation pattern]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round probability variation symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the eighth round. When it corresponds to the "8-round probability variation symbol", it shifts to the "high probability time reduction state" by activating the "probability fluctuation function" and the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed.

[6 round probability variation pattern]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the sixth round. When it corresponds to the "6 round probability variation symbol", it shifts to the "high probability time shortening state" by activating the "probability fluctuation function" and the "time shortening function" after the jackpot game is completed.

[11 round normal design]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "11 round normal symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the 11th round. When it corresponds to "11 rounds normal", it shifts to the "low probability time reduction state" by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game.

[3 round probability variation pattern]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "three-round probability variation symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the third round. When it corresponds to the "three-round probability variation symbol", it shifts to the "high probability time reduction state" by activating the "probability fluctuation function" and the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed.

[5-round probability variation pattern]
In the above-mentioned processing during the special symbol stop display, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "5-round probability variation symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the fifth round. When it corresponds to the "5-round probability variation symbol", it shifts to the "high probability time reduction state" by operating the "probability fluctuation function" and the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed.

[5 round normal design]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "5-round normal symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the fifth round. If it corresponds to "5 rounds normal", the "low probability time reduction state" is entered by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "probability variation symbols", the player is given the privilege of shifting the internal state to the "high probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "normal symbols", the internal state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends.

The opening time, inter-round interval time, and ending time during the jackpot game are the same "5.0 seconds", "1.5 seconds", and "7.0 seconds", respectively. The opening time is the waiting time from the start of the big hit game to the opening of the big winning opening, and the inter-round interval time is the waiting time set between the rounds and the ending. The time is a waiting time set after the final round of the jackpot game is completed.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When a small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates) in the normal probability state or the high probability state. The game to be played) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but the winning of the first big winning opening hardly occurs. In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so the mode shifts to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state". No benefits are granted (it is not a prerequisite for this). In addition, even if a small hit is won in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the small hit game ends, and even if the small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small hit is set, but the game specification may be such that a small hit is not set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in, for example, another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may simply read out random numbers in the order in which they are stored, without setting priorities for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, the display mode of the stored number by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the normal probability state. To. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400. Here, the range of the jackpot value is set according to the set value. Therefore, the range of the jackpot value is wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value. When a setting difference is provided for the winning probability of a small hit, the range of the small hit value is set according to the set value. Therefore, the range of the small hit value is wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the jackpot flag is not set to a value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16).

In the present embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be left, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the disconnection pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is in the "time reduction state". Check if it exists. In the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to the shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach fluctuation is performed (reduced fluctuation time determining means). ). Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach is changed. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5). About seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer. Information about the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command (the same applies at the time of winning).

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery, control is performed such that, for example, a "reach effect" is generated and the result is lost, or a "reach effect" is not generated and the player is lost. It is said. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability / high probability non-time shortened state) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the low-probability or high-probability non-time reduction state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "6" and "7" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. Corresponding, the fluctuation pattern number "8" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment after super reach. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (hereinafter, the same applies).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than twice that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection (low probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when non-winning is applicable) in the low probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "21" to "28" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "21" to "25" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "26" to "28" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. However, since the fluctuation pattern numbers "21" to "25" are non-reach fluctuations due to time-shortening fluctuations, a shortened fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time in the normal state. ..

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "41" to "48" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "41" to "45" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "46" to "48" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. However, the fluctuation pattern numbers "41" to "45" are extremely shortened fluctuation times (for example, about 0.5 seconds) as the fluctuation time in the normal state in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time shortened state. Is set.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (special section) at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used when a non-winning is applicable in a special section in a high probability time shortened state or a low probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). The special section is a section that shifts after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol", and when the counter value for variation pattern selection is 1 or more. This is the section that shifts to.

Here, the fluctuation patterns at the time of deviation in the special section in the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state are all the same fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is, for example, about 20 seconds) in order to realize the treasure challenge effect described later. Is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach special variation pattern 50) is selected.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “50” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach special fluctuation pattern 50 is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened by the number of stored devices.

[See Fig. 34: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, as the winning symbols selected at the time of big hit, "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 6", "8 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol", "11 rounds""Normalsymbol","3 round probability variation symbol", "5 round probability variation symbol", and "5 round probability variation symbol" are prepared. In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "11-round probability variation symbol 1", "11-round probability variation symbol 1a", "11-round probability variation symbol 1b", "11-round probability variation symbol 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "2", "3", "31", "1", " "10", "2", and "35" correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In addition, in the second column from the left, "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", "15 round probability variation symbol 1", "8 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol", corresponding to each distribution value, "11 rounds normal design" is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 9" is 2/100 (= 2%), and "11 round probability variation symbol 10" is selected. The ratio is 3/100 (= 3%), the ratio of selecting "11 round probability variation symbol 11" is 31/100 (= 31%), and "15 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected. The ratio is 1/100 (= 1%), the ratio of selecting "8 round probability variation symbol" is 10/100 (= 10%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol". Is 2/100 (= 2%), and the ratio of selecting "11 round normal symbol" is 35/100 (= 35%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

Here, the "substantial" in the figure means the number of long open round games in a big hit game including a round game in which the big winning opening is short-opened and a round game in which the big winning opening is long open. Is shown. The round game may be executed using the first large winning opening, or may be executed using the second large winning opening. Further, "next time" in the figure means that "10000 times" is set as the probability variation number. A big hit in which the number of rounds and the actual number match indicates that there is no round game that is released short (only a round game that is opened long).

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" to "0FH" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and "11 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

In the three columns on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the values of the probability variation number, the time reduction number, and the special variation count given after the end of the jackpot game are shown.

[Probability change count]
In the present embodiment, when any of the probabilistic symbols is applicable, the number of probable changes is given 10,000 times (next time of probabilistic change). On the other hand, if any of the normal symbols is applicable, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time reduction]
In the present embodiment, when "11 round probability variation symbol 1 to 10", "15 round probability variation symbol 1", "8 round probability variation symbol", and "6 round probability variation symbol" are applicable, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times ( Probability change next time). In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 11", the number of time reductions is given 10 times. In this case, when the probability change for 10 fluctuations (high probability time reduction state) is completed, the state shifts to the latent probability change state (high probability non-time reduction state). In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 11" in the latent probability variation state, the time reduction number of times may be given 10000 times (so-called latent continuation is not performed). Further, in the case of corresponding to "11 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is given 10 times. In this case, when the time reduction for 10 fluctuations (low probability time reduction state) is completed, the state shifts to the normal state (low probability non-time reduction state).

[Number of special fluctuations]
In the present embodiment, when "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" and "11 round normal symbols" are applicable, the number of special fluctuations is set. Specifically, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 1", "1 time" is set as the number of special fluctuations, and when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 2", it corresponds to "2 times" as the number of special fluctuations. Is set, and such a setting continues until "11 round probability variation symbol 10", and when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 11" and "11 round normal symbol", "10 times" is set as the number of special fluctuations. Set. In addition, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbol 1", "8 round probability variation symbol", and "6 round probability variation symbol", the number of special fluctuations is not set.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "33", "4", "3", "6" are shown. , "8", "3", "5", "35" correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "15 round probability variation symbols 2-7", "3 round probability variation symbol", "5 round probability variation symbol", and "5 round normal symbol" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. ing. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "15 round probability variation symbol 2" is 33/100 (= 33%), and "15 round probability variation symbol 4, 5" is selected. The ratio of each is 3/100 (= 3%), the ratio of selecting "15 round probability variation symbol 6" is 6/100 (= 6%), and "15 round probability variation symbol 7" is The selected ratio is 8/100 (= 8%), the ratio of selecting "3 round probability variation symbol" is 3/100 (= 3%), and "5 round probability variation symbol" is selected. The ratio is 5/100 (= 5%), and the ratio of selecting "5 round normal symbol" is 35/100 (= 35%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values "01H" to "09H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "15 round probability variation symbol 2" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H01H". Become.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

In the three columns on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the values of the probability variation number, the time reduction number, and the special variation count given after the end of the jackpot game are shown.

[Probability change count]
In the present embodiment, when any of the probabilistic symbols is applicable, the number of probable changes is given 10,000 times (next time of probabilistic change). On the other hand, if any of the normal symbols is applicable, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time reduction]
In the present embodiment, when the "15 round probability variation symbol 2-7", the "3 round probability variation symbol", and the "5 round probability variation symbol" are applicable, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times (probability variation next time). On the other hand, if it corresponds to the "5-round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times (100 times of time reduction). In this case, when the time reduction for 100 fluctuations (low probability time reduction state) is completed, the state shifts to the normal state (low probability non-time reduction state).

[Number of special fluctuations]
In the present embodiment, in the case of winning with the second special symbol, the number of special fluctuations is not set.

[See Fig. 34: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production. Basically, the super reach production has a longer fluctuation time and the expectation of winning is higher than the reach production such as the normal reach production and the long reach production. Further, at the time of winning in the state where the time reduction function is activated, even if the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (the fluctuation pattern without the reach effect) is selected without selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. Good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability / high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in a low probability or high probability non-time reduction state (variation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is not distinguished according to the type of jackpot (winning symbol), but a dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table may be used for each jackpot (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "66" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit by the super reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers "67" and "68" are the reach effects (other than the super reach effect). Reach production) is performed and it corresponds to the fluctuation pattern that becomes a hit.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "81" to "88" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "81" to "88" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "101" to "108" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "101" to "108" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect. It should be noted that, at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state, a fluctuation pattern that is a hit without the reach effect may be set.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (special section).
This selection table is a table used when a big hit is hit in a special section in a high probability time shortened state or a low probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means).

Here, the fluctuation patterns at the time of big hit in the special section in the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state are all the same fluctuation pattern (in order to realize the special winning effect in the treasure challenge production described later). The fluctuation time is set to, for example, about 30 seconds), and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern 170 per non-reach).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “170” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value. The special variation pattern 170 per non-reach is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened by the number of stored items.

[See Fig. 34: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is "any probability variation symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag ( 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability fluctuation function operating means). Further, when the type of the winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is "any of the normal symbols", the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag (low probability state setting means). , Low probability state transition means, probability state setting means).

Further, in the main control CPU 72, even if the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is "any winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 serves as a game state flag and a time reduction function operation flag. (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operating means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol (small hit stop symbol number) at the time of small hit based on the big hit symbol random number. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning symbol at the time of small hit, "double open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, another type such as "1 time open small hit symbol" or "3 times open small hit symbol" may be prepared. As mentioned above, the "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", so it is essential for this type of pachinko machine. It is possible to provide a "one-time open small hit symbol" without being bound by the "two rounds (two-time opening) or more" rule.

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[Fig. 33: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the process during the special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 34). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Disappearance fluctuation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the deviation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2600: The main control CPU 72 loads the fluctuation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”. The “counter value for selecting a fluctuation pattern” is a counter value managed by the main control CPU 72, and is a variable to be referred to when executing a special fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern selection counter value is set in the special fluctuation number setting process (FIG. 55) described later.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2606. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2602.

Note that when the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0", it means that special fluctuation is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0", special fluctuation is performed. It means not to do it.

Step S2602: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortened state. The internal state can be confirmed by the probability fluctuation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2608. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2604.

Step S2604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the low probability time shortened state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2610. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2612.

Step S2606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to the deviation pattern selection table (FIG. 38) for the special section.
Step S2608: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to the out-of-time fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 37) for the high probability time shortened state.

Step S2610: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the variation pattern with reference to the out-of-date variation pattern selection table (FIG. 36) for the low probability time shortened state.
Step S2612: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the variation pattern with reference to the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (FIG. 35) for the non-time reduction state (low probability / high probability non-time reduction state).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 34).

[Big hit fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2710: The main control CPU 72 loads the fluctuation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2716. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2712.

Step S2712: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the high probability time shortened state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2718. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2714.

Step S2714: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the low probability time shortened state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2720. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2722.

Step S2716: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the variation pattern with reference to the jackpot variation pattern selection table (FIG. 44) for the special section.
Step S2718: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 43) for the high probability time shortened state.

Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 42) for the low probability time shortened state.
Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 refers to the jackpot variation pattern selection table (FIG. 41) for the non-time reduction state, and executes a process of determining the variation pattern.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 34).

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 34), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. To do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 with respect to the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol whose target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories increases". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ") Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an added value (for example," 10H ") meaning" decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption ". Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 34).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) and repeatedly executes the process during the special symbol stop display even in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. If the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot is "15 round jackpot", the value corresponding to "15 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of jackpot is "3 round jackpot", a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). For example, when the type of jackpot is "15 round jackpot", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "15 rounds". When the jackpot type is "3 round jackpot", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation count command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and the value is simply off (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation management process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of managing special fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game. The details of the special fluctuation management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cut counter. In the "count cut counter", each counter value is set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state". Although "cutting the number of times" is used here, the value of the number cutting counter in the "high probability state" can be set to an extremely huge value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such a huge value, it is possible to stochastically guarantee that the "high probability state" will continue until the next winning is obtained. A value (for example, 10 times, 100 times, 10000 times, etc.) is set for the number-of-times cut counter related to the "time reduction state".

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, if the number-of-times counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630 after generating the number-of-times counter value command.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-of-times counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not 0. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number-cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, when the value of the number-cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. It is the probability fluctuation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag that is reset, but since the value of the count-off counter that counts the high probability state in the "high probability state" does not substantially become 0. , It is the time saving function activation flag that is actually reset. As a result, the time reduction state and the high probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. After completing the above procedure, the process returns to the special game management process.

[Special fluctuation management process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special fluctuation management process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the fluctuation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 has a special symbol. The process returns to the process during stop display (FIG. 48).

Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (1 subtracting) the fluctuation pattern selection counter value. As a result, the number of times the special variation is executed (the number of times the special variation can be executed) is reduced by one.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the processing during the special symbol stop display (FIG. 48).

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit.
The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and a jackpot big hit. It is configured to include a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing. If the operation process is completed, the big hit opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large hit opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes the symbol-specific open pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (the number of opening for each round and the opening time for each round), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. Set the number of winnings), opening time, ending time, etc. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). Specifically, if "15 rounds jackpot" is selected as the jackpot type, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 15. If "3 rounds jackpot" is selected as the jackpot type, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 3. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening timer at the time of a big hit based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer, the opening time is a sufficient time for the ball to easily enter the winning opening during one opening (for example, firing control). The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 second is set as the value of the timer, the opening time is a short time that hardly occurs (becomes difficult) even if it is not impossible to enter the big winning opening during one opening. (For example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening interval timer based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the big hit.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is generated based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

When the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened, the main control CPU 72 generates a first large winning opening opening command or a second large winning opening opening command. The first special winning opening opening command and the second winning opening opening command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 51) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5308. To execute.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit at this stage. Execute repeatedly.

When it is determined in step S5306 above that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then performs step S5312. Execute.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal for applying to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is completed. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

When the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed, the main control CPU 72 generates a first large winning opening closing command or a second large winning opening closing command. The first grand prize opening closing command and the second winning opening closing command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer set in the above-mentioned big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 51).

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not still 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 50) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the "number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" in each round is set once in each round. Therefore, in each round, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No).

In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the above steps S5301 to S5320 are performed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed big winning opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. The jackpot closing process at the time of a big hit is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter becomes "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 50). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of big hit again after executing the jackpot closing process at the time of big hit, and performs the above steps S5402 to S5408. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (15 times, etc.).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 34) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5508: When the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, 10000 times). The set value of the number of probability fluctuations is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-mentioned number-cutting counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times of about 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that non-winning will continue to that extent (the winning probability at high probability is, for example, 1/32 to 1/100). (Degree), in effect, the high probability state will continue until the next winning. On the contrary, when a practical upper limit is set in the high probability state, the number of probability fluctuations is set to a realistic number (for example, about 70 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 34) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction number of times (for example, 10, 100 times or 10000 times). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the major winning combination, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability is in progress" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction in progress". Generates a state specification command that represents. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a variation pattern selection counter value based on the type of winning symbol. The details of the special fluctuation number setting process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

[Special fluctuation count setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special fluctuation number setting process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning corresponds to either "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning corresponds to either "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that this winning corresponds to either "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols", the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing (FIG. 54). Return.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation pattern selection counter value to a value corresponding to the winning symbol. The value according to the winning symbol is set according to the value of the number of special fluctuations in FIG. 39. As a result, after the jackpot game is completed, the special variation is executed 1 to 10 times. The set fluctuation pattern selection counter value is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once. Then, through such processing, the main control CPU 72 can make the selected variation pattern a normal variation or a special variation.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot end process (FIG. 54).

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit.
The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is completed. If the opening / closing operation processing of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hit opening pattern", for example, an opening pattern of "0.1 second opening" is set for each of the first and second times. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer as described above, and in such an opening time, most of the prizes to the large winning opening occur during one opening. It is not (difficult) for a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the launcher unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is in the countdown (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is generated. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 57) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 (the first major winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of small hit at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 has the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S6306.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal for applying to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is completed. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 57).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 56). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S6301 and directly executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 57). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 56) at the time of small hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 56). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set number of opening (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 56) at the time of small hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the small hit end processing. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 56).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "small hit in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a big hit, the internal condition device operates (for example, the flag corresponding to the condition device is turned ON), but in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate. The procedure is solely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit.

[LED display setting process]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the LED display setting process.
The LED display setting process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) include the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, and the normal symbol display device 35. In the process of generating a drive signal (common output data) applied to each LED of the symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. is there. The generated common output data (display data) is stored in the RAM of the used area and output in the dynamic port output process (hereinafter, the same applies).

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating a drive signal (common output data) to be applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time reduction state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 has a lighting signal (common output data) for the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. To generate. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. You can switch to the display (off). Further, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d does not light when the state shifts to the latent probability change state (high probability non-time shortening state), but the power is turned off in the latent probability change state, and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. Lights up when restored. On the other hand, if the time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal (common) to the LED corresponding to the time reduction status indicator lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Output data) is generated. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f according to the launch position designation status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game (when "1" is set in the firing position designation status), the main control CPU 72 fires. A lighting signal (common output data) for LED corresponding to the position designation lamp 38f is generated. On the other hand, when the normal game is in progress in the low probability non-time shortened state (when "0" is set in the firing position designation status), the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f ( Common output data) is not generated. If the time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal (for common output) to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Data) is generated. When the launch position designation lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF).

The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d can adopt any of the following lighting methods.
(1) The first lighting method is a method mainly used for models equipped with a latent probability change function, and does not light even in a probability fluctuation state (high probability state), and is in a probability fluctuation state when the power is turned on. It is a method to turn on when it is turned on. For example, when the latent probability change state exists, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d can be prevented from lighting when the state shifts to the latent probability change state, and it lights even during the probability change (high probability time shortened state). You can avoid it.
(2) The second lighting method is a method mainly used for models that are not equipped with the latent probability change function, and is a lighting method that lights up when the probability fluctuates.
As these lighting methods, one of the lighting methods can be adopted depending on the specifications of the model of the gaming machine and the like.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is the combination of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "15 rounds", the main control CPU 72 has all the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "15 rounds" (for example, all the lamps 38a, 38b, 38c). Generates a lighting signal (common output data) for the lamp. If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "3 rounds", the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal (common output) to the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "3 rounds". Data) is generated. Since the three indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the six types of jackpots of the present embodiment. It is preferable that the details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are displayed around the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in order to clearly convey the details to the player.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the first procedure of the addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S602: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the normal prize ball addition number, the normal out addition number, and the total out addition number.
The normal prize ball addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal prize ball addition number. The normal out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal out number. The total out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the total out addition number.

Step S604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S606. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S608.

Step S606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the total out addition number. For example, when the value of the total out addition number is "0", the value of the total out addition number is "1".

Step S608: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special game management phase. The value of the special game management phase will be described later.

Step S610: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot is in progress. Whether or not the jackpot is in progress can be confirmed by the value of the special game management phase (during the jackpot: special game management phase = "03H" to "07H").

As a result, when it is confirmed that the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the jackpot is in progress (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S612.

Step S612: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the time is being shortened. Whether or not the time is shortened can be confirmed by the time reduction function operation flag.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time is being shortened (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the time is being shortened (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S614.

Step S614: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the right-handed instruction is being given. Whether or not a right-handed strike is being instructed can be confirmed by the launch position designation status.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the right-handed instruction is being performed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the right-handed instruction is being performed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S616.

By executing the process of step S614, the main control CPU 72 can determine whether or not to calculate the base based on the content of the launch position designation status (based on the content determined by the launch position determining means). (Means for determining whether or not base calculation can be executed).

Further, by executing the process of steps S610 to S614, the main control CPU 72 should launch the game ball into the second game area when the jackpot game is being executed, when the time is shortened, or when the game is in the second game area. If it is one of the cases where it is determined to be present, it can be determined not to calculate the base (base calculation execution enablement determination means).

Further, by executing the processes of steps S610 to S614, the main control CPU 72 should launch the game ball into the first game area when the jackpot game is not being executed, when the time is shortened, or when the game is in a non-time shortened state. If it is one of the cases where it is determined to be present, it can be determined by calculating the base (base calculation execution enablement determination means).

Step S616: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the out switch 99.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S618. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S620.

Step S618: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the normal out addition number. For example, when the value of the normal out addition number is "0", the value of the normal out addition number is "1".

Step S620: Has the main control CPU 72 input a detection signal from each winning opening switch (for example, middle starting winning opening switch 80, right starting winning opening switch 82, first winning opening switch 86, second winning opening switch 81)? Check if it is not.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S622. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

Step S622: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding all the prize balls generated by this interrupt to the normal prize ball addition number.
For example, the value of the normal out addition number is "0", and with this interruption, the middle start winning opening 26 (middle starting winning opening switch 80: number of winning balls = 4), the right starting winning opening 28a (right starting winning opening) When one game ball is inserted into each of the mouth switch 82: the number of prize balls = 1) and the normal winning mouth 22 (first winning mouth switch 86: the number of prize balls = 3), the value of the normal out addition number Is "8 (= 4 + 1 + 3)". The switch for the prize ball and the number of prize balls are determined based on the prize ball number data stored in the used area. Since the switch to be awarded and the number of prize balls may differ depending on the model, this process is model-dependent.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the second procedure of the addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described. As for the first procedure example and the second procedure example, either one of the procedure examples can be adopted.

Step S630: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S631. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S632.

Step S631: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99, the main control CPU 72 sets “1” in the number of shot balls B (total out addition number).

Step S632: When the main control CPU 72 cannot confirm that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99, the main control CPU 72 sets “0” in the number of shot balls B (total out addition number).

Step S633: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state. The reason for determining whether or not the player is in a specific game state is that the number of launched balls A and the number of acquired balls, which are the basis of the base calculation, are not counted in the specific game state.

Here, the specific gaming state can include at least one of (1) big hit, (2) time saving, and (3) right-handed instruction. In addition, the reason for including "(3) Right-handed instruction" is that the specific game state includes "during the small hit rush state (while adopting the simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the second This is because it includes "in a state where small hits frequently occur due to fluctuations in special symbols, that is, in a high-probability non-time shortening state)" and does not include "in latent probability change (in a high-probability non-time shortening state)". ..

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is a specific gaming state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S634. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the gaming state is a specific gaming state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S635.

Step S634: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the number of launched balls A (normal out addition number) to “0” and setting the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number) to “0”. Then, when this processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

Step S635: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of copying (substituting) the value of the number of launching balls B (total out addition number) to the number of launching balls A (normal out addition number).

Step S636: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the total number of prize balls by the game balls that have won the prize opening to the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number). The switch for the prize ball and the number of prize balls are determined based on the prize ball number data stored in the used area. Since the switch to be awarded and the number of prize balls may differ depending on the model, this process is model-dependent.
Here, regarding the big prize opening, it is not necessary to calculate the number of prize balls because the big hit is excluded from the calculation of the base, but when you want to include the number of prize balls in the normal small hit in the base Can also calculate the number of prize balls for the big prize opening.

The "acquired ball number", "launched ball number A", and "launched ball number B" are all variables stored in the used area of the RAM 76.
Then, when this processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the number of launched balls.
When the "gaming state" is "during big hit", "during time saving", or "during right-handed instruction", the value of the number of shot balls is the value shown below.

At the time of "out switch detection", the "number of launched balls A" becomes "0" and the "number of launched balls B" becomes "1".
In "when the out switch is not detected", the "number of launched balls A" is "0" and the "number of launched balls B" is "0".

When the "gaming state" is "normal" or "latent (latent probability variation state)", the value of the number of launched balls is the value shown below.

At the time of "out switch detection", the "number of launched balls A" is "1" and the "number of launched balls B" is "1".
In "when the out switch is not detected", the "number of launched balls A" is "0" and the "number of launched balls B" is "0".

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the performance display monitor control process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S640: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the stack pointer and all the registers.

Step S642: The main control CPU 72 executes the out-of-area RAM clear check process. This process is a process outside the region. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and executes a process of initializing if it has not been initialized.

Step S643: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H", "02H", or "03H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S648. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S644.

By executing such a process, it is possible to prevent the process related to the original performance display monitor 200 from being executed when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, similar to the process outside the area called in the main loop. it can.

The game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. In this case, the original processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, it may be set that "the processing outside the area is not called while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced", but this is not adopted in the present embodiment because the amount of code in the used area increases. That is, the amount of code in the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced outside the area. In this way, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing the processing related to the performance display monitor 200 while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 may restrict the execution of at least a part of the other process during the execution of one of the setting-related process and the base-related process. Yes (restriction means). That is, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (step S643; Yes), the main control CPU 72 can prevent the main control CPU 72 from executing at least a part of the base-related processing (step S644 and step S646).

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (whether or not one of the processes is being executed), and the determination result is affirmative. If, it is determined to limit the execution of at least a part of the base-related processing (the other processing), and if the judgment result is negative, at least a part of the base-related processing (the other processing) is processed. It is possible to execute the determination process (determination process of step S643) for determining not to restrict the execution of the above (restriction means).

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute a determination process (determination process in step S643) as a process included in the process outside the area (second process) (second process). Processing execution means).

Step S644: The main control CPU 72 executes the ball number addition process. This process is a process outside the region. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 calculates the number of launch balls A (normal out addition number), the launch ball number B (total out addition number), and the acquisition number calculated by the "addition number calculation process" executed as the processing of the used area. A process of adding the number of balls (normal prize ball addition number) to various counters arranged outside the area of the RAM 76 is executed.

Specifically, the main control CPU 72 processes to add the number of fired balls A (normal out addition number) to the normal out number (normal out counter), and the number of fired balls B (total out counter) to the total out number (total out counter). The process of adding the number of added balls, the process of adding the number of acquired balls (the number of added normal prize balls) to the number of normal prize balls (the number of normal prize balls counter), and the like are executed. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S646: The main control CPU 72 executes the performance display monitor display process. This process is a process outside the region. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 blinks the performance display monitor 200, changes the display contents, and sets the display data. The display content is changed, for example, by repeating "turning on for 0.3 seconds, turning on for 0.3 seconds, or turning off (when blinking)" eight times (after a total of 4.8 seconds have passed). The contents to be switched are "the base currently being measured" and "the base of the section for the previous 60,000 shots".

Then, the start of the division task (division process) is set at the timing of the eighth "lighting or extinguishing" (when 4.5 seconds have passed from the start of display). After that, the division task is executed through the performance display monitor aggregation division process called from the main loop process. The calculation in the division task is a process that ends at the latest when the display content is changed (4.8 seconds after the start of the display, 0.3 seconds after the start of the division task).

Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating common output data for controlling the lighting of the LED included in the performance display monitor 200 based on the base value.

For example, when "the base of the current section is 30%", the main control CPU 72 sets the data corresponding to "bL." As the common output data (display data) in the common 0, 1 buffer, and sets the common 2 , 3 Executes the process of setting the data corresponding to "30" as the common output data (display data) in the buffer.

Step S648: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of returning the stack pointer and all the registers.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the ball number addition process.
The ball number addition process is a process outside the region. The ball number addition process is called by the performance display monitor control process called by the timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number) to the normal prize ball number counter (normal prize ball number). For example, when the value of the normal prize ball counter is "100" and the value of the acquired ball number is "8", the value of the normal prize ball counter is "108".

Step S652: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number) to the normal out counter (normal out number). For example, when the value of the normal out counter is "299" and the value of the number of launched balls A is "0", the value of the normal out counter is "299".

Step S654: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) to the total out counter (total out number). For example, when the value of the total out counter is "299" and the value of the number of launched balls B is "1", the value of the total out counter is "300".

The "normal prize ball counter", "normal out counter", and "total out counter" are variables stored in the RAM outside the area.
In addition, the values of the "normal prize ball counter" and the "normal out counter" are used for the base calculation, and the values of the "total out counter" are used for updating the aggregation section.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor control processing (FIG. 65).

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the performance display monitor aggregation division processing.
The performance display monitor aggregation division process is a process outside the area. The performance display monitor aggregation division processing is called from the main loop processing.

Step S660: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the stack pointer and all the registers.

Step S6611: The main control CPU 72 executes the out-of-area RAM clear check process. This process is a process outside the region. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and executes a process of initializing if it has not been initialized.

Step S662a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is "01H", "02H", or "03H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S668. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S663.

The game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced. In this case, the original processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, it may be set that "the processing outside the area is not called while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced", but this is not adopted in the present embodiment because the amount of code in the used area increases. That is, the amount of code in the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced outside the area. In this way, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing the processing related to the performance display monitor 200 while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced.

In the game stop state, the "game stop flag", which is installed in so-called two-type models (game machines with a specific area), is also adopted for one-type models, and the game is being changed or referenced. It can be migrated by setting the stop flag.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 may restrict the execution of at least a part of the other process during the execution of one of the setting-related process and the base-related process. Yes (restriction means). That is, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (step S662a; Yes), the main control CPU 72 can prevent the main control CPU 72 from executing at least a part of the base-related processing (steps S663 to S668).

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced (whether or not one of the processes is being executed), and the determination result is affirmative. If, it is determined to limit the execution of at least a part of the base-related processing (the other processing), and if the judgment result is negative, at least a part of the base-related processing (the other processing) is processed. It is possible to execute the determination process (determination process of step S662a) for determining not to restrict the execution of the above (restriction means).

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute a determination process (determination process in step S662a) as a process included in the process outside the area (second process) (second process). Processing execution means).

Step S663: In the main control CPU 72, whether or not the section is changed (whether or not the section for displaying the base has shifted to a new section), that is, the value of the total number of outs (total out counter) is 60,000. Is multiplied by n (integer) and 300 is added to confirm whether or not the value is larger than the value obtained by adding 300. Note that n is a value indicating the current section, and 1 is set as an initial value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the section is changed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S664. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the section has been changed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S666.

Step S664: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of storing the value of the normal prize ball number (normal prize ball number counter) and the value of the normal out number (normal out counter) in the dedicated buffer.
Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the value n indicating the current section and updating it.

In this process, it is preferable not to save the base value. The reason for this is that when the total number of outs reaches a certain value (60,000) and the base display section is switched, "normal prize balls ÷ normal outs x 100 rounded" is calculated and the result is saved. It is possible to do this, but it takes too much time for the main control CPU 72 to perform this calculation. Therefore, in this process, the optimum calculation method is to execute only the process of saving the normal number of prize balls and the normal number of outs, and then perform the calculation at an appropriate timing. This is a calculation method based on the idea of "shortening the processing time in the worst case", and is an important matter for the stable operation of gaming machines, especially pachinko machines. However, in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the base value (for example, a process of storing the base value calculated in step S667 described later as the base value of the previous section). May be good.

Step S665: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the value of the number of normal prize balls and the value of the number of normal outs.
After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 then executes the process of step S668.

Step S666: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating the start address of the division task. By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 can execute an operation (processing such as division and subtraction) for calculating the base in the division task by a predetermined amount (for example, 1 bit).

As described above, since it takes time to execute the division process on the main control CPU 72, the division process is executed in several times in the present embodiment.
Specifically, by preparing a table that stores the start address shown below, calculating the start address of the module to be executed this time, and setting that address in the program counter (PC), the division process can be performed a little. It is executed one by one (divided into small pieces).

(1) Standby processing before division execution (first address)
(2) Division preparation process (first address)
(3) Processing to find the 64th place of the quotient (first address)
(4) Processing to find the 32nd place of the quotient (first address)
(5) Processing to find the 16th place of quotient (first address)
(6) Processing to find the 8th place of the quotient (first address)
(7) Processing to find the 4th place of the quotient (first address)
(8) Processing to find the second place of the quotient (first address)
(9) Processing to find the first place of the quotient (first address)
(10) Rounding process (first address)
(11) Standby processing after the completion of division (first address)
For example, the "standby process before division execution" in (1) above is executed when "0" is set in the next task (next task decision status), and the "division preparation process" in (2) above is executed. Is executed when "1" is set for the next task. By such control processing, the contents of the following division tasks can be executed little by little. The initial value of the next task is 0.

Step S667: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of executing (calling) a division task. This process is a process outside the region. The division task includes 11 tasks (division task 0 to division task 10), and the division task 0 to the division task 10 are called in order. The content of the division task will be described later.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process (base-related process) for calculating the base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200 as a process included in the process outside the area (second process). (Second processing execution means). The base-related processing includes at least one of the processing required to calculate the base and the processing required to display the base.

Step S668: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of returning the stack pointer and all the registers.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop processing (FIG. 16).

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the processing of the division task 1.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the processing of the division tasks 2 to 8.
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the processing of the division task 9.
There are 0 to 10 division tasks, and the value of the next task is referred to in the process of calculating the start address of the division task (S666), and the start address of the division task to be actually executed is specified. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the content of the division task processing described below is described in an example in which the operation of calculating the base is performed bit by bit in one call, but the operation of calculating the base is completed in one call. You may let me.

Further, after the completion of the base calculation, it may be monitored whether the value of the RAM outside the area is abnormal. The start of the division task (start of the base calculation) may be set in the performance display monitor display process.

If "0" is set for the next task, the division task 0 is executed. Although the content of the division task 0 is not particularly shown, the standby process before the division is executed is executed. In the final process of the division task 0, "1" is set for the next task.

When "1" is set for the next task, the division task 1 shown in FIG. 68 is executed.
Hereinafter, the processing flow of the division task 1 will be described.

Step S730: The main control CPU 72 initializes an integer (variable) to “128 (2 × 64)” and executes a process of saving “128” in the integer buffer.

Step S732: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the normal out number, multiplies the loaded value of the normal out number by an integer "128", and executes a process of saving the multiplied value as a divisor in the divisor buffer.

Step S734: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the normal prize balls, multiplies the loaded value of the normal prize balls by "2" and "100", and saves the multiplied value as a division in the division buffer. To execute.

Step S736: The main control CPU 72 initializes the quotient to “0” and executes a process of saving “0” in the quotient buffer.

Step S738: The main control CPU 72 sets “2” for the next task.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor aggregation division processing (FIG. 67).

When "2" to "8" are set for the next task, the division tasks 2 to 8 shown in FIG. 69 are executed.
Hereinafter, the processing flow of the division tasks 2 to 8 will be described.

Step S740: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the divisor saved in the divisor buffer is equal to or greater than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the divisor saved in the divisor buffer is equal to or greater than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S742. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the divisor saved in the divisor buffer is equal to or greater than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S746.

Step S742: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the divisor saved in the divisor buffer from the divisor saved in the divisor buffer, and executes a process of saving the subtraction result as a new divisor in the divisor buffer.

Step S744: The main control CPU 72 adds a integer stored in the integer buffer to the quotient saved in the quotient buffer, and executes a process of saving the addition result as a new quotient in the quotient buffer.

Step S746: The main control CPU 72 divides the divisor saved in the divisor buffer by "2" (shifts by 1 bit to the right), and executes a process of saving the division result as a new divisor in the divisor buffer.

Step S748: The main control CPU 72 divides the integer saved in the integer buffer by "2" (shifts by 1 bit to the right), and executes a process of saving the division result as a new integer in the integer buffer.

Step S750: The main control CPU 72 sets the value obtained by adding 1 to the current task (the value of the current next task) in the next task.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor aggregation division processing (FIG. 67).

When "9" is set for the next task, the division task 9 shown in FIG. 70 is executed.
Hereinafter, the processing flow of the division task 9 will be described.

Step S752: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is "1" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S754. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is "1" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S756.

Step S754: The main control CPU 72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by "2" (shifts by 1 bit to the right), adds "1" to the division result, and executes a process of storing the quotient in the base buffer. ..

Step S756: The main control CPU 72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by "2" (shifts by 1 bit to the right), and executes a process of storing the division result in the base buffer.

Step S758: The main control CPU 72 sets “10 (value corresponding to standby processing)” for the next task.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor aggregation division processing (FIG. 67).

If "10" is set for the next task, the division task 10 is executed. Although the content of the division task 10 is not particularly shown, the standby process after the division is executed is executed. In the final process of the division task 10, "0" is set for the next task.

Next, the display mode of the performance display monitor 200 and the calculation method of the base (base ratio) displayed on the performance display monitor 200 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the performance display monitor 200.
The main control device 70 displays on the performance display monitor 200 the base when the gaming state is the low-probability non-time shortening state, the high-probability non-time shortening state, and the left-handed instruction. Here, the base is calculated for each preset section (for example, every 60,000 total outs). The base (percentage:%) can be calculated by base = number of normal prize balls ÷ number of normal outs × 100.

As shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the performance display monitor 200 switches between the base of the current section and the base of the previous section at preset intervals (for example, several seconds). Is displayed.

In the performance display monitor 200, the identifiers "bL." Or "b6." For identifying whether it is the base of the current section or the base of the previous section are displayed by the 7 segments 201 and 202. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, the base corresponding to the identifier "bL." Or "b6." Is displayed as two-digit numerical information by the seven segments 203 and 204.

For example, assuming that the base of the current section is 30%, when displaying the base of the current section, "bL." Is displayed in the 7 segments 201 and 202 as shown in FIG. 71 (A). Then, "30" is displayed in the 7 segments 203 and 204. Further, assuming that the base of the previous section is 38%, when displaying the base of the previous section, "b6." Is displayed in the 7 segments 201 and 202 as shown in FIG. 71 (B). Then, "38" is displayed in the 7 segments 203 and 204.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a base section displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
Here, between the time when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured and the time when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall (game hall) and the game is played by the player, inspections at the time of manufacture and test runs (operation checks) in the hall are performed. Will be. Game balls will be fired and ejected during such inspections during manufacturing and test runs in halls, but if the number of out balls and the number of ejects during this period are counted, the game will be played by the player. There is a risk that the base cannot be calculated accurately during the period.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the first section (non-target section) in which the total number of out balls detected by the out switch 99 is 0 to 300 is inspected at the time of manufacturing. It is excluded from the target for which the base is calculated by regarding the number of out balls detected before the game by the player, such as a test run in a hall.

Similarly, the number of payouts paid out in the section where the number of out balls is 0 to 300 is also excluded from the target for calculating the base. In this non-target section, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier "bL." Is blinked and "---" is displayed as the base value. Lights up and displays. Further, since the previous section does not exist, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier "b6." Is blinked and "---" is lit as the base value.

Then, the number of out balls from 301 to 60300 is set as the first section, and in the first section, the base is calculated at any time (in real time), and when the base of the current section is displayed, the identifier "bL." Is displayed, and the calculated base value is lit up. At this time, while the number of out balls is from 301 to 6299 (while the number of out balls in the section is 5999 or less), the identifier "bL." Is displayed in blinking to calculate the base of the current section. Notify that the sample is scarce and the base is not stable. After that, when the number of out balls becomes 6300 or more (the number of out balls in the section becomes 6000 or more), there are many samples for calculating the base of the current section by lighting and displaying the identifier "bL.". , Notify that the base is stable.

In addition, since the previous section does not exist in the first section, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier "b6." Is blinked and "---" is lit as the base value. indicate.

In addition, in the second section where the number of out balls is 60301 to 120300, the base is calculated at any time (in real time) as in the first section, and when the base of the current section is displayed, the number of out balls is displayed. The identifier "bL." Is lit or blinking according to the above, and the calculated base is displayed. Further, in the second section, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier "b6." Is lit and displayed, and the final base of the first section is lit and displayed.

In this way, every 60,000 out balls (for each nth section) excluding the first 300 out balls, the base calculated in real time is displayed as the base of the current section, and the n-1th section. The final base of is displayed as the base of the previous section.

As a result, the number of out balls and the number of discharged balls before the game by the player, such as inspection at the time of manufacturing and test run (operation check) in the hall, can be excluded from the target for calculating the base, and the base can be excluded. It can be calculated (displayed) accurately.

When calculating the base, the base may temporarily exceed 100%. For example, when the first ball in the section enters the middle start winning opening 26, the number of out balls is 1, while the number of payouts is the winning ball obtained by entering the middle starting winning opening 26. It will be a number (eg 4) and the base will be 400%. In such a case, since the performance display monitor 200 can display the base only with two-digit numerical information, it is notified that the base exceeds 100% by lighting and displaying "99.".

FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a base calculation method.
Here, a method of calculating the base assuming that the normal number of prize balls is "3456" and the normal number of outs is "10000" will be described.

As described above, the base is a value obtained by finally converting the number of emissions with respect to the number of out balls for each section into a percentage. Then, when displaying such a percentage, only two digits after the decimal point are required for the result of division.

Then, the process of calculating the value of such a percentage (the process of "converting to%") corresponds to multiplying by the multiplicand "100". Therefore, it can be expressed by the formula of base = number of normal prize balls ÷ number of normal outs × 100. However, when the number of normal prize balls ≤ the number of normal outs, if the calculation is performed in the order of this formula, the value will be a value after the decimal point, and for example, the main control device 70 cannot calculate.

Therefore, the calculation order is changed, and the calculation is performed in the order of base = normal prize ball number × 100 ÷ normal out number (first, the normal prize ball number is multiplied by the multiplicand, and then divided by the normal out number). By doing so, it is possible to complete the operation result only with an integer without performing the operation after the decimal point.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value after the decimal point when converted to a percentage is rounded off.
However, since the main controller 70 cannot handle the numbers after the decimal point and the calculation is performed in binary, the normal prize ball number × the multiplicand “100” and the normal out number are doubled first to make the base 2 Find a double value. Then, if the least significant bit (corresponding to the value after the decimal point) of twice the value (binary number) of the obtained base is "1" (if the value after the decimal point is 0.5 or more), the calculated base After adding "1" to the doubled value, the value is halved (shifted by 1 bit to the right) to round up the decimal point, and the lowest bit (corresponding to the value after the decimal point) of the doubled value of the obtained base. ) Is "0" (if the number after the decimal point is less than 0.5), the value after the decimal point is rounded down by halving the value of the obtained base as it is (shifting to the right). As a result, the value after the decimal point can be rounded off.

Specifically, in the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), division is replaced with subtraction, and the division "691200" which is 2 x the number of normal prize balls (3456) x 100 is changed to the divisor "10000" which is the normal out number. And subtract the number multiplied by the predetermined integer "128 (2 x 2 to the 6th power)" which is the power of 2 and then divide the integer from "64 (2 x 2 to the 5th power)" → "32". (2x2 to the 4th power) "→" 16 (2x2 to the 3rd power) "→" 8 (2x2 to the 4th power) "→" 4 (2x2 to the 1st power) "→" 2 (2) Change in the order of "x2 to the 0th power)" → "1 (2 x 2 to the -1st power)" (shift 1 bit to the right), multiply by the divisor, and subtract from the dividend. Here, the integer to be multiplied by the divisor starts from 2 × 64 because the display of the base is in the range of 0 to 99, and when the base is 100% or more, "99.9" is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to subtract a numerical value of "2 x 128 (2 to the 7th power)" or more.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, in the first calculation, the division <division, so the process proceeds to the next. Then, in the second calculation, since the division ≥ divisor, the division "64 (2 x 32) x 10000" is subtracted from the division "691200" to update the division to "51200" and the quotient "0" to "64". Is added to update the quotient to "64 (1000000B in binary)". In the 3rd to 5th operations, the division <division, so the process proceeds to the next step. In the sixth operation, since the division ≥ divisor, the division "4 (2 x 2) x 10000" is subtracted from the division "51200" to update the division to "11200" and the quotient "64" to "4". In addition, the quotient is updated to "68 (1000100B in binary)". In the seventh operation, the division <division, so the process proceeds to the next. In the 8th operation, since the division ≥ divisor, the division "1 (2 x 0.5) x 10000" is subtracted from the division "11200" to update the division to "1200" and the quotient "68" to "1". Is added to update the quotient to "69 (1000101B in binary)".

After that, in the ninth operation, the updated quotient "69 (1000101B in binary)" is divided by 2 (shifted by 1 bit to the right) to obtain the final base. At this time, if the quotient is simply divided by 2, the quotient becomes "34.5". However, since the main controller 70 cannot handle the decimal point as described above, the case where the least significant bit of the quotient is "1B". , After shifting the quotient "69" by 1 bit to the right, add "1" to make the quotient "35 (0100011B in binary)".

According to such a calculation example, division can be realized only by simple operations such as addition, subtraction, and multiplication, and by only integers. Further, here, since it is sufficient to repeat the calculation nine times, the calculation process can be performed quickly. In addition, the base decimal point can be rounded off.

[Basic operation of setting-related processing]
74 to 76 are timing charts showing the basic operation of setting-related processing.

FIG. 74 shows an example when the process related to the setting reference (mode for confirming the setting) is executed.
FIG. 75 shows an example when a process related to setting change (mode for changing setting) is executed.
FIG. 76 shows an example when an abnormality occurs in the RAM.

Further, (A) in each figure shows an ON or OFF state of the power supply.
In each figure (B), the ON or OFF state of the setting key is shown.
In each figure, (C) shows the ON or OFF state of the RAM clear switch 304.
In each figure (D), the ON or OFF state of the setting switch is shown. When the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used, either one of (C) or (D) in each figure may be omitted, or (C) and each in each figure may be omitted. (D) in the figure can be combined.

In each figure (E), the contents displayed on the performance display monitor 200 are shown.
In each figure, (F) shows an ON or OFF state of external information (for example, a security signal).
In each figure (G), the content to be displayed on the error display (for example, the liquid crystal display 42) is shown.
In each figure (H), the change of the gaming state is shown.
In each figure, (I) shows the state of the switch.

[Refer to settings]
In FIG. 74 (A): The power is turned off at time t1, and the power is turned on at time t3.

In FIG. 74 (B): The setting key is turned on at time t2, and the setting key is turned off at time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the setting key needs to be OFF, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 74 (C): The RAM clear switch is OFF from time t1 to time t5. After the time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 74 (D): The setting switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. After the time t3, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 74 (E): The performance display monitor 200 is hidden from time t1 to time t5. The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value from the time t5 to the time t7. After time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

In FIG. 74 (F): External information is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from the time t3 to the time t6. The external information is OFF after the time t6. The ON state of the external information may be extended until the time t7. The external information may be output for at least a certain period of time (50 ms) or longer.

In FIG. 74 (G): The error display is hidden from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t6, the error display is the setting reference display. The setting-referencing display is, for example, displaying the character information "setting-referenced" on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is hidden after time t6. The display during setting reference may be extended to time t7. The period of external information and error display is the same as the period of end of setting reference, but it is not necessary to match. The period of the setting reference end is the processing time required for the transition from the setting reference end to the normal game. The shortest time for completing the setting reference can be 0 ms.

In FIG. 74 (H): The gaming state is power failure from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. From time t5 to time t6, the gaming state is a setting reference. From time t6 to time t7, the game state is the end of setting reference. After time t7, the game state is a normal game.

In FIG. 74 (I): All switches are invalid from the time t1 to the time t4. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switch is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.

〔setting change〕
In FIG. 75 (A): The power is turned off at time t1, and the power is turned on at time t3.

In FIG. 75 (B): The setting key is turned on at time t2, and the setting key is turned off at time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the setting key needs to be OFF, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 75 (C): The RAM clear switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The RAM clear switch is ON from time t3 to time t5. After the time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF. The RAM clear switch may be turned on (or pressed) at time t2 in the same manner as the setting key.

In FIG. 75 (D): The setting switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. From time t3 to time t5, the setting switch may be ON or OFF. Every time the setting switch is pressed from time t5 to time t6, the setting switch is turned on. After time t6, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 75 (E): The performance display monitor 200 is hidden from time t1 to time t5. The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value from the time t5 to the time t7. After time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

In FIG. 75 (F): External information is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from the time t3 to the time t6. External information is OFF from time t6 to time t8. The ON state of the external information may be extended until the time t7. The external information is ON from the time t8 to the time t9. The external information is OFF after the time t9. The external information may be output for at least a certain period of time (50 ms) or longer. The external information (security / initialization) to be output from time t8 to time t9 may be output for a certain period of time (50 ms) or more, and external information may be continuously output depending on the output timing of the external information. ..

In FIG. 75 (G): The error display is hidden from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t6, the error display is a setting changing display. The setting changing display is, for example, displaying the character information "setting is being changed" on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is hidden from time t6 to time t7. The display during setting change may be extended to time t7. From time t7 to time t10, the error display is an initialization display. The initialization display is, for example, displaying the character information "Initialization completed" on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is hidden after time t10.
The period of external information and error display is the same as the period of setting change end, but it is not necessary to match. The setting change end period is the processing time required for the transition from the setting change end to the normal game. The shortest time to complete the setting change can be 0 ms.

In FIG. 75 (H): The gaming state is a power failure from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. From time t5 to time t6, the game state is a setting change. From time t6 to time t7, the game state is the end of setting change. After time t7, the game state is a normal game.

In FIG. 75 (I): All switches are invalid from the time t1 to the time t4. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switch is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.
It is preferable to execute the RAM clear from the time t5 to the time t7.

[When RAM is abnormal]
In FIG. 76 (A): The power is turned off at time t1, and the power is turned on at time t3.

In FIG. 76 (B): The setting key is OFF at time t1. After the time t1, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 76 (C): The RAM clear switch is OFF at time t1. After the time t1, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.
The setting key and the RAM clear switch may be shifted to the setting change state when the transition condition for changing the setting is satisfied.

In FIG. 76 (D): The setting switch is OFF at time t1. After the time t1, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

In FIG. 76 (E): The performance display monitor 200 is hidden from time t1 to time t5. After the time t5, the performance display monitor 200 displays the content corresponding to the error.

In FIG. 76 (F): External information is OFF from time t1 to time t5. The external information is ON after the time t5.

In FIG. 76 (G): The error display is hidden from time t1 to time t5. After the time t5, the error display is a game stopped display. The game stopped display is, for example, displaying the character information such as "an error is occurring" or "the game is stopped" on the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 76 (H): The gaming state is power failure from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. After the time t5, the game state is the game stopped.

In FIG. 76 (I): All switches are invalid from the time t1 to the time t4. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switch is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t5, all switches are invalid.

In addition to the basic configuration of the timing chart described above, the following modification examples are also possible.
(1) As a transition condition to the setting change state (setting change mode) or the setting reference state (setting reference mode), the condition that "the inner frame is being opened" is also set, and "the setting key is OFF and inside". When the frame closure continues for a certain period of time (100 ms continuation), the setting change state or the setting reference state ends.
(1a) The setting change state or the setting reference state may be terminated by keeping the setting key OFF state for a certain period of time (for example, continuing for 100 ms) without considering the state of the inner frame.

(2) When the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is OFF, the setting confirmation state (setting change state) or the setting reference state ends.

(3) Before starting the setting reference, the power restoration process is performed. If the checksum is abnormal, the RAM is cleared. Even in this case, the setting changing flag, setting value, and outside the area are not cleared.
(3a) When the checksum is abnormal, the setting changing flag, the set value, and the memory outside the area may be cleared to set the RAM error error state.

(4) When the setting change or setting reference condition is satisfied, the setting changing flag is set. In this case, the setting changing flag is set in the initial flow (for example, CPU initialization processing), and the setting is changed or the setting is changed based on the content of the setting changing flag during the execution of the timer interrupt processing after shifting to the main loop. Executes the setting reference process.

(5) When the setting change is completed, the program jumps to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing), a checksum error is generated, and RAM other than the set value is cleared.

(6) Immediately after the setting is confirmed, the game becomes available (shifts to the normal game state). That is, it is not a condition that the RAM is cleared again after the setting is confirmed, or that a predetermined time elapses before the transition to the normal game.
(6a) For reasons such as preparation of the effect control device, only the elapse of a predetermined time may be a condition.

(7) While the setting is being changed, the game stop flag is set so that the processing related to the game is not performed.
(8) Common main loop processing and common timer interrupt processing are used during normal game, setting change, and setting reference.

(9) The timer interrupt common to the normal game, the setting change, and the setting reference is at least one of the dynamic port output process, the port input process, the external information management process, and the port output process.

(10) Separate main loop processing and separate timer interrupt processing are used during normal game, setting change, and setting reference.
(11) During the normal game, the timer interrupt by the first timer (timer 0) is used, and during the setting change and the setting reference, the timer interrupt by the second timer (timer 1) is used. The interrupt period may be the same or different.

(12) Use the same RAM clear switch and setting change switch (also used).
(13) Use separate RAM clear switch and setting change switch (do not use them together).

The following is a modification of the security signal.
(14) A security signal is output only while the setting is being changed, and is not output while the setting is being referenced.
(15) A security signal is output during setting change and setting reference, and the output time is different. For example, a security signal is output for 30 seconds while the setting is being changed, and a security signal is output for 5 seconds while the setting is being referenced.

(16) While the setting is being changed, both the security signal and the out signal are output.
(17) A "setting change signal" is newly added, and the newly added "setting change signal" is output during the setting change.

(18) One of the existing signals (big hit signal 4, etc.) is used as a setting change signal and is not used in conventional applications.
(19) During the setting change, the "security signal" and the "setting change signal" are output.

(20) A security signal is output each time the setting change switch (RAM clear switch) is pressed during the setting change.
(21) When the setting is confirmed, the output of the security signal is started. When the setting is confirmed, the output of the security signal is finished.

(22) When the setting is confirmed, the pulse of the setting change signal is output for the number of times of setting (for example, the number of times the setting change switch is pressed and the number of times corresponding to the set value after confirmation).
(23) When the setting key is ON during the normal game (when the setting key is turned), a security signal is output.

[Example of processing when the power is turned on]
77 to 79 are views showing an example of processing when the power is turned on.

FIG. 77 shows an example of the first processing in the case where the previous power off is in the normal game and the RAM is normal (the backup flag is normal) when the power is restored.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the second processing in the case where the previous power off is in reference to the setting and the RAM is normal when the power is restored.
FIG. 79 shows an example of a third process in which the RAM is abnormal (the backup flag is abnormal) when the power is restored, regardless of the state of the previous power off.

As shown in FIG. 77, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM76) clear data other than the data related to the setting-related processing and the performance display monitor-related processing. Then, (2) the setting shift state is entered after the power is turned on, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

If the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) the setting reference state is entered after the power is turned on, and (6) the performance display. The monitor 200 displays the set value.

Further, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory clear the data other than the data related to the setting-related processing and the performance display monitor-related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Shifts to the normal gaming state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) the game shifts to the normal gaming state after the power is turned on, and (12) performance. The display monitor 200 displays the base.

As shown in FIG. 78, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM76) clear data other than the data related to the setting-related processing and the performance display monitor-related processing. Then, (2) the setting shift state is entered after the power is turned on, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

If the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) the setting reference state is entered after the power is turned on, and (6) the performance display. The monitor 200 displays the set value.

Further, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory clear the data other than the data related to the setting-related processing and the performance display monitor-related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Shifts to the normal gaming state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (11) after the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting reference state or the normal gaming state. (12) The performance display monitor 200 displays a set value or a base. When shifting to the setting reference state in (11) above, it is preferable to display the set value in (12) above, and when shifting to the normal gaming state in (11) above, it is based in (12) above. Is preferably displayed.

As shown in FIG. 79, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM76) clear the data other than the data related to the performance display monitor related processing, and (2) ) After the power is turned on, the setting shift state is entered, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. In the above (1), when the RAM is an abnormal value, the data related to the performance display monitor related processing may be cleared.

When the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (6) the performance display. The monitor 200 displays an error code (for example, "E" is displayed).

Further, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are not changed, (8) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (9) the performance display. The monitor 200 displays an error code.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (12) performance. The display monitor 200 displays an error code.

Then, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the processing of the contents shown in FIGS. 74 to 79 by the main control device 70 or the effect control device 124. The contents of the processes shown in FIGS. 74 to 79 may not be executed depending on the model.

[Launch position management process]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the launch position management process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S1100: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the normal game management phase is “03H” to “07H”.

[Normal game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value (inside the key brackets) of the normal game management phase according to the progress status (1) to (8) of the game corresponding to the normal symbol as follows.
(1) Normal symbol change waiting state: "00H"
(2) Normal symbol fluctuation display status: "01H"
(3) Normal symbol stopped symbol display status: "02H"
(4) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) Waiting for opening: "03H"
(5) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) Open state: "04H"
(7) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) Closed state: "05H"
(8) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) During operation end time: "06H"
(9) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) Effective after closing: "07H"

Here, when the value of the normal game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a normal game management phase command that reflects the value. The normal game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1110.

Step S1110: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the special game management phase is “03H” to “07H”.

[Special game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value (inside the key brackets) of the special game management phase according to the progress of the game (1) to (8) corresponding to the special symbol, for example, as follows.
(1) Waiting for special symbol change: "00H"
(2) Special symbol fluctuation display status: "01H"
(3) Special symbol stop symbol display status: "02H"
(4) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) Waiting for opening: "03H"
(5) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) Open state: "04H"
(6) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) Closed state: "05H"
(7) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) Operation end time State: "06H"
(8) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) Effective after closing: "07H"

Here, when the value of the special game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a special game management phase command that reflects the value. The special game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H", that is, during the big hit game or the small hit game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (No), that is, when it cannot be confirmed that the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress, the main control CPU 72 steps. Execute S1120.

Step S1120: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the time shortened state. Whether or not the time is shortened can be confirmed by the time reduction function operation flag.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time shortened state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1130.

Step S1130: The main control CPU 72 sets the firing position designation status to a value (0) corresponding to left-handed strike.

Here, the "launch position designation status" is a variable that holds whether the current gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to left-handed hitting or a gaming state corresponding to right-handed hitting.
Specifically, if "0" is set in the launch position designation status, it indicates that the current gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to left-handed (left-handed state), and the launch position designation status is "1". If is set, it indicates that the current gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting state).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can confirm whether the current gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to left-handed hitting or the gaming state corresponding to right-handed hitting by referring to the value of the firing position designation status. it can.
Further, the value of the firing position designation status is stored in the RAM 76, and when a power off state occurs, the value is backed up.

Step S1140: The main control CPU 72 sets the firing position designation status to the value (1) corresponding to right-handed striking.

Step S1150: When the launch position designation status is set in step S1130 or step S1140, the main control CPU 72 next generates a launch position designation command (launch position designation information notification means). Here, the main control CPU 72 generates a command that reflects the value of the launch position designation status as the launch position designation command. Specifically, when the value of the launch position designation status is a value (0) indicating a left-handed strike, the main control CPU 72 generates a launch position designation command indicating a left-handed strike. On the other hand, when the value of the launch position designation status is the value (1) indicating right-handed strike, the main control CPU 72 generates a launch position designation command indicating right-handed strike. The launch position designation command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[Game flow in non-time saving state]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a game flow in a non-time shortened state.

When starting a game with a pachinko machine, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode in the [F0] non-time shortened state. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state". Therefore, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game is started. proceed.

As the [F0] non-time reduction state, there is a [F2] festival mode in addition to the [F1] normal mode. [F2] The festival mode is a low-probability or high-probability non-time reduction state.

In the [F2] festival mode, when the [F3] specified condition (for example, the condition that the special symbol fluctuates 10 times in the low probability non-time shortened state) is satisfied, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F4] "11 round normal symbol" or "11 round probability variation symbol 11" is applicable, [F5] 11 round jackpot game (challenge bonus) is executed. In the [F6] treasure challenge production, the [F7] failure production is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F2] festival mode.

[F6] The treasure challenge production is a probabilistic promotion judge production that is executed using the first to tenth fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F8] "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 10" is applicable, [F5] 14 round jackpot game (challenge bonus) is executed, and [F6] treasure challenge. In the production, the [F9] success production is executed, and the process shifts to the [F10] fireworks rush. [F10] The fireworks rush is in a state of shortening the time with high probability.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F11] "15 round probability variation symbol 1" is applicable, [F12] 15 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed, and [F10] fireworks rush as it is. Transition. In this case, the [F6] treasure challenge effect is not executed.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F13] "6 round probability variation symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol" is applicable, the mode transition effect is executed together with the 6 round jackpot game or the 8 round jackpot game. , As it is, shift to [F10] fireworks rush.

[Game flow in a time-saving state]
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a game flow in a time-reduced state.

The [G0] time reduction state is roughly divided into [G1] fireworks rush (high probability time reduction state) and [G2] coast mode (low probability time reduction state).

In [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G3] "15 round probability variation symbol 2-7" or "3 round probability variation symbol" is applicable, [G4] battle reach effect executed during variable display In [G5] victory production is executed, and after the end of the [G6] 15 round jackpot game (fireworks bonus), the game shifts to [G1] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G7] "5 round normal symbol" is applicable, [G8] defeat effect is executed in the battle reach effect executed during [G4] variable display. Then, after the end of the [G9] 5-round jackpot game (normal bonus), the mode shifts to the [G2] coast mode.

In addition, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G10] "5 round probability variation symbol" is applicable, [G8] defeat effect is executed in the battle reach effect executed during [G4] fluctuation display. However, during the execution of the [G9] 5-round jackpot game (normal bonus), the [G11] major role promotion effect (reversal effect, revival effect, and probability change promotion effect are executed), and after the end of the jackpot game, [G1] Move to fireworks rush.
It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect pattern is performed as described above.

The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, and these are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each production design is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol sequence is variablely displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 83 is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect is performed between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used) starts the variable display and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 83 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory number display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually, for example, "15 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to them (for example, red display color). The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 may be displayed by LEDs arranged on the board instead of being displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 83 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol strings on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (effect execution). means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scroll (flow) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 by the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (the changing memory display effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Stop the left symbol]
In FIG. 83 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 83 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed increases accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 83 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be intuitively and easily taught that "is changing."

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 83 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops fluctuating thereafter. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. is there. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 83 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for non-winning, at the time of big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIG. 84 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (winning). At the time of a big hit, different effects can be executed according to the winning symbol. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, the first special symbol is the mode of the jackpot (for example, "self", "yo" of the 7-segment LED. , "Mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until the display is stopped (reach effect execution means). In FIG. 84, each effect symbol is shown simply by a number. Further, the above markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, the explanation will be given along with the flow of the production. Further, the following reach effect is a normal reach effect, but a super reach effect (not shown) different from the following reach effect may be executed according to the selected fluctuation pattern.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 84 (A): For example, in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from above) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down).

[Pre-reach notice production (1st stage)]
In FIG. 84 (B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is variablely displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, for example (other modes of appearance). It may be.). In addition, the "pre-reach notice" here means to give a notice of the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit before any of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 84 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode proceeds to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 84 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display of the effect symbol is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 84 (D): The variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped in the middle of the variable display effect. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 84 (E): Then, following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the right position of the screen, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred. Then, an image that emphasizes one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the result of winning has not been displayed yet at this point). In the reach effect, only the effect symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, "5") are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurs (1st time)]
In FIG. 84 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, for example, a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed in which images representing "heart" figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. .. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach notice, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 84 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, images representing the numbers "2" to "6" are displayed on the screen in a state of forming a three-dimensional column, and the columns are displayed. From the beginning (front), the images of numbers are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", and so on. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implying) or reminding the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" if it remains unerased until the end. Further, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means a "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "off". In the case of deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in the order of the numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increases. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at once.

[Notice production after reach occurs (second time)]
In FIG. 84 (H): When the reach effect is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were split into a large copy, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the reach occurs, a notice production (second time) will be performed. At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is that "if the number" 5 "remains unerased, the possibility of a big hit of" 5 "-" 5 "-" 5 "increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that "the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased, and if the number" 5 "is left unerased at the end, it becomes a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the big hit may finally be near" can be obtained.

[Stop the middle production design]
In FIG. 84 (I): The last middle effect symbol is stopped. In this example, the effect symbol representing "5" is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 84 (J): Then, for example, the stop display is also performed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol in substantially synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, with the left, middle, and right effect symbols restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined in the effect.

Further, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol, which is the object of this change, is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is performed to inform that the change did not result in a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outlier reach effect".

[Challenge bonus production (directing during major roles)]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a challenge bonus effect.
The challenge bonus effect is executed during the jackpot game when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol".

[1 round]
In FIG. 85 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. In addition, at the lower right corner of the screen, an effect symbol (here, the number "1") corresponding to the winning symbol is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 1 production symbol”. In addition, the characters "Challenge Bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a horse character is displayed around the screen.

Further, during the big hit game (during the special game), the character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and the arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 85 (B): After that, when the jackpot game progresses smoothly and shifts to 5 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND5" is displayed on the screen and is unique to the jackpot game. The production image of is displayed. The actual jackpot game continues until the 11th round, but after the 6th round, the jackpot is opened short (for example, 0.1 seconds open) in each round. Therefore, this fifth round is the actual final round.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 85 (C): At the timing when the jackpot game ends, the major winning combination end effect that conveys the effect content to be executed after that is executed. In this example, the text information "Treasure challenge rush!" Is displayed on the screen.

[Example of treasure challenge production]
FIG. 86 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the treasure challenge production.
The treasure challenge production is a probabilistic promotion judge production that is executed using the 1st to 10th fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game when the "11th round probabilistic symbol 1 to 11" or the "11th round normal symbol" is applied. is there. In the treasure challenge production, the horse character searches for the treasure, and if the treasure can be found, it will enter the fireworks rush. The flow of the production will be described below in order.

In FIG. 86 (A): "Treasure challenge production" by performing the first variation display after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbol". Is started. The effect symbol is executed in a variable display effect in a reduced state at the upper left corner position of the screen ("changing"-"changing"-"changing"). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Game explanation production]
When the treasure challenge production is started, the game explanation production is first executed. In the illustrated example, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the hermit character is performing a production that utters the line "If you can find the treasure, it's time to rush into the fireworks rush!".

In addition, during the treasure challenge (during time reduction / probabilistic change), the character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect). If the treasure challenge is successful, the launch position designation effect will continue to be executed as it is because the right-handed state will continue (see (C) and (E) in the figure), but the treasure challenge has failed. In that case, it will be left-handed and will end (see (F) in the figure).

[When the 11th round probability variation symbol 1 is won]
In FIG. 86 (B): When the previous jackpot corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 1", the number of special fluctuations is one, so the success effect is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Specifically, a production in which a horse character finds a treasure is executed. Then, the word "success" is displayed at the top of the screen, and the hermit character utters the line "superb!"

[At the end of fluctuation]
In FIG. 86 (C): All the production symbols are stopped and displayed because the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game is completed ("1"-"2"-"3"). .. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In addition, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state".

[11 round probability variation symbol 2-11 or 11 round normal symbol winning]
In FIG. 86 (D): On the other hand, in the case of winning in either "11 round probability variation symbol 2-11" or "11 round normal symbol", a failure effect is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Then, the word "failure" is displayed at the top of the screen, and the hermit character utters the line "sorry".

[At the end of fluctuation]
In FIG. 86 (E): All the production symbols are stopped and displayed because the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game is completed ("4"-"5"-"6"). .. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

Further, at this timing, an effect of instructing the player that the treasure challenge effect will continue is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Treasure challenge continues!" Is displayed on the screen. Then, in the case of "11 round probability variation symbols 2 to 10", the treasure challenge production is continued until the special variation set for each winning symbol is completed, and finally, in the treasure challenge production. Success production is executed.

[At the end of fluctuation]
In FIG. 86 (F): On the other hand, when it corresponds to "11 round normal symbol" or "11 round probability variation symbol 11", the failure effect is executed even in the 10th fluctuation (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game. Will be done. In addition, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter the festival mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the festival mode of the "low probability or high probability non-time reduction state". In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 11" in the high probability non-time shortened state, the number of time reductions is set to 10000 times, so that the success effect is executed in the 10th fluctuation after the end of the big hit game. be able to.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 87 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the fireworks rush.
The fireworks rush is in a state of shortening the time with high probability, and continues until the special symbol fluctuates 10,000 times unless a winning result is obtained after the big hit game. The flow of the production will be described below in order.

In FIG. 87 (A): The variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Further, during the probability change (during the high probability time shortening state), the character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and the arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

In FIG. 87 (B): Then, since the first variation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game is completed, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7". "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 87 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the high probability time shortened state, the variable start winning device 28 is operated with high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit right, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Often referred to.

[Fireworks bonus production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the fireworks bonus effect.
The fireworks bonus effect is an effect executed during the jackpot game when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbol 2-7" or "3 round probability variation symbol".

[1 round]
In FIG. 88 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. In addition, the characters "fireworks bonus" are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen, and an image of an animal character straddling a horse is displayed in the center of the screen.

Further, during the big hit game (during the special game), the character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and the arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

[Final round]
In FIG. 88 (B): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and the game shifts to the final round. For example, when a 15-round jackpot is executed, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 15" is displayed on the screen.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 88 (C): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Normal bonus production]
FIG. 89 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the normal bonus effect.
The normal bonus effect is an effect executed during the jackpot game when the "5-round normal symbol" or the "5-round probability variation symbol" is applicable.

[1 round]
In FIG. 89 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game in the normal bonus effect is started, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. In addition, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the image of the dog character is displayed in the center of the screen.

Further, during the big hit game (during the special game), the character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and the arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 89 (B): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to the final 5 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND5" is displayed on the screen and the big hit game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 89 (C): At the timing (during the ending time) when the jackpot game ends when the “five-round normal symbol” is applied, the major role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends. If it corresponds to the "5-round probability variation symbol", the major role promotion effect is executed during the execution of the normal bonus effect, and the process shifts to the fireworks rush.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 90 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coast mode.
The coast mode is shifted after the jackpot game is completed when the time is shortened and the "5-round normal symbol" is applied. The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be described below in order.

In FIG. 90 (A): The variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "coast mode". The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs in order to express the healing impression which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Further, during the time reduction (during the low probability time reduction state), the character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and the arrow symbol indicating the right side portion in the game area 8a is displayed (launch position designation effect).

In FIG. 90 (B): Then, due to the end of this change (at the time of non-winning), all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 90 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coastal mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without a winning result. When the coastal mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability of non-time reduction. If the winning result is obtained in the coastal mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, memory number display effect, major role effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in the timer interrupt process separately from the reset start process of the effect control device (not shown), for example. The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process of the effect control device, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), firing position designation effect management process (step S403), and display output process (step S404). , Ramp drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start port. Winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end production command, number cut Counter value command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, prize ball content command, launch position specification command, normal game management phase command, special game management phase command, power return specification command, RAM clear specification command, setting confirmation There are specified commands, etc.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the storage number display effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed. Control the content of the production. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S403: In the launch position designation effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the launch position designation effect (launch position designation effect execution means). Specifically, when the content of the launch position designation command is a value indicated by right-handed movement, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the launch position designation effect.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the VDP 152 with basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the working memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice. The effect pattern number, the variation effect pattern number, the change notice effect number, the background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the VDP 152 controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driver IC 132. In response to this, the driver IC 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, a board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the audio IC 134 of the effect content (for example, BGM during the variable display effect, the reach effect, the mode transition effect, the jackpot effect, etc.). .. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection and random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery).

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the working memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. The contents will be described below with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is stored when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S702 and S703. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute steps S702 and S703.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 executes the look-ahead effect management process (look-ahead effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a determination process as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (marker change effect, zone effect, continuous effect, etc.), and if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect Executes the process of determining the specific contents of.

By executing such a process, when the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is satisfied (when the special effect execution condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 is executed over a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. The look-ahead effect can be executed (look-ahead effect execution means).

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery is being changed from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to be moved to the display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 91).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process (effect execution means), execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing when the variable winning device is activated (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) includes a case where the large hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 33) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or a small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). When step S6000) in the middle is selected, it is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (reach other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.) are selected. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the VDP 152 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect according to the result. Instruct VDP152 to control information of the content (button effect).

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the VDP 152 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the VDP 152 actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (effect execution means). ). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in the same or similar manner as the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of a 15-round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 15-round large-duty effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the VDP 152 of this. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 91) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 91). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time, and stop. Determine the display mode and the like. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, case of reach occurrence). Determines the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.). The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

When any of the processes of step S608, step S610, and step S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the advance notice effect is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 126 wins the lottery for whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (when the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 is elected during the execution of the variable display effect (predetermined effect). The advance notice effect (related to the predetermined effect, which suggests the success or failure of the predetermined effect) suggesting that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode is executed (notice effect execution means).

Further, when it is determined in the advance notice selection process that the advance notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining at which timing during the variable display the advance notice effect is to be started. In addition, various notice effects (step-up notice effect, conversation notice effect, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect, character drop effect, next notice effect, title color change effect) executed during the variable display are included in the notice effect. ), Pseudo continuous notice effect, look-ahead notice effect, memory marker change notice effect, etc. are also included.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the "normal mode (low probability non-time reduction state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in which a female character is sitting on a chaise longue. Further, when the stay mode is "fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with a fireworks motif. Further, when the stay mode is the "coast mode (low probability time shortened state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with the coast as a motif.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 93), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types are executed. The notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern.

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of jackpot fluctuation pattern this fluctuation is.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern (No). , The effect control CPU 126 executes step S806.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process for each special variation pattern. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a big hit in the treasure challenge effect.

Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process after reaching. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect according to the type of variation pattern (long or short of the variation time).

Then, when the process of step S804 or step S806 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-process (FIG. 94).

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the deviation effect variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of out-of-range fluctuation pattern this fluctuation is.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern (No). , The effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is an out-of-reach fluctuation pattern.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S828, and it cannot be confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S830.

Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special variation pattern deviation effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the treasure challenge effect while the special symbol is fluctuating, continues the treasure challenge effect based on the type of the previous winning symbol, shifts to the fireworks rush, or switches to the festival mode. Select the effect pattern to be transferred.

Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes the out-of-reach effect selection process after the reach. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the reach effect and selects an effect pattern that is out of alignment based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes the non-reach off effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that would be out of alignment without executing the reach effect, based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

Then, when any of the processes of step S826, step S828, or step S830 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 94).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a time shortened state (low probability time shortened state or high probability time shortened state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state specification command, and confirms whether or not the internal state is the time shortened state.

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time shortened state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern. This confirmation can be performed by confirming the variation pattern command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the previous winning symbol is the “5-round normal symbol”. To confirm which symbol the previous winning symbol corresponds to and which state the previous internal state was, the RAM 130 stores information on the winning symbol and information on the internal state at the time of the previous winning. It can be realized by.

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the previous winning symbol is the "5-round normal symbol" (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S860. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol is the "5-round normal symbol" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S862.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the non-time reduction state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in the "normal mode" or a background image in the "festival mode". For example, the effect control CPU 126 basically executes a process of selecting a background image in the “normal mode” in the low probability non-time reduction state. Further, the effect control CPU 126 selects the background image of the "festival mode" after the treasure challenge effect, and when the special symbol fluctuates a specified number of times (for example, 10 times) in the low probability non-time shortened state, the "normal mode" ”, The process of selecting the background image is executed.

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the treasure challenge effect.

Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the fireworks rush.

Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the coast mode.

Then, when any of the processes of steps S856 to S862 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-process (FIG. 94).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operating processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operating processing (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the processing at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each processing.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S904 to step S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the post-processing after operating the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.

For example, when it corresponds to "11 round normal symbol" and "11 round probability variation symbol 1 to 11", a process of selecting a challenge bonus effect is executed.
In addition, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbol 1", the process of selecting the special bonus effect is executed.
Further, when it corresponds to the "6 round probability variation symbol" or the "8 round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the large role medium effect (mode transition effect) that suddenly shifts to the fireworks rush is executed.

On the other hand, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbol 2-7" or "3 round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the fireworks bonus effect is executed. In addition, when it corresponds to the "5-round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the effect to execute the big role promotion effect is executed during the execution of the normal bonus effect (5-round big hit effect). Further, when it corresponds to the "5-round normal symbol", the process of selecting the effect to execute the normal bonus effect (5-round jackpot effect) is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the VDP 152 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during the execution of the jackpot effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. Instructs control information to VDP152.

Step S908: In the post-operation of the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the end time of the variable winning device.

The effect control CPU 126 executes the coast mode rush effect or the fireworks rush rush effect according to the winning symbol. Specifically, if it corresponds to "11 round normal symbol" or "11 round probabilistic symbol 1 to 11" at the time of winning, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the player is entering the "treasure challenge" is executed. , "15 round probability variation symbol 1", "15 round probability variation symbol 2-7", "3 round probability variation symbol", "5 round probability variation symbol", an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered. Is executed, and if it corresponds to the "5-round normal symbol", the process of selecting the effect indicating that the coastal mode is entered is executed.

As described above, the present embodiment has the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, execution of at least a part of base-related processing (base calculation processing and base display processing) is restricted while setting is being changed or setting is being referenced (setting-related processing is being executed). Therefore, at least a part of the base-related processing is not executed during the setting change or the setting reference, and the control processing of the main control device 70 is compared with the method in which both processings are continuously executed. The load can be reduced, and as a result, efficient control processing related to the setting can be executed.

(2) According to the present embodiment, since the determination process (determination process of step S643 and determination process of step S662a) is executed in the process outside the area (second process), the determination process is performed in the used area (first process). The process can be prevented from being executed, and the amount of program code in the used area (first process) can be reduced.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the performance display monitor 200 can display the set value or the base, and when the performance display monitor 200 is displaying the set value, the base is not displayed and the performance display monitor Since the setting value is not displayed when the 200 is displaying the base, not only can the hardware resource of the performance display monitor 200 be used for two purposes, one for the setting and the other for the base, but only the setting value is displayed. By doing so or displaying only the base, it is possible to easily avoid misunderstandings and confusion between the setting changer and the base confirmer.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called loop type (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the probability variation number), but an ST type (a substantial upper limit is set for the probability variation number). The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine of type).

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having no probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region.

In the above-described embodiment, the first process is the timer interrupt process and the second process is the serial communication receive interrupt process. However, the first process may not be the interrupt process. For example, the first process may be the main loop process, and the second process may be a timer interrupt process or a serial communication receive interrupt process.

In the above-described embodiment, when the interrupt disallowed process is executed, the interrupt disallowed process is executed before the interrupt disallowed process is executed. However, if the interrupt is already disabled, the interrupt is disabled. Interrupt disallow processing may be executed without executing interrupt prohibiting processing.
For example, the interrupt enable process (step S201a) and the interrupt disable process (step S163) may not be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, among the processes for calculating the base as special information (special program code / special program data) to be arranged in the used area, a determination process for determining whether or not to calculate the base based on the game state, In addition, although the example of including information related to at least one of the confirmation processes for confirming the value of the number of prize balls has been described, the special information includes the processes other than the determination process and the confirmation process among the processes for calculating the base. May be included, and the special information may include only information related to the determination process or only information related to the confirmation process.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a game machine that does not adopt "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", but for a game machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. However, the present invention can be applied. In this case, it is also possible to add the playability of the small hit rush (the game property in which the small hit is frequently won in the second special symbol lottery).

When the simultaneous rotation is adopted, for example, a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations can be used.
(1) During the period when the first special symbol is changing, the second special symbol can also be changed.
(2) The average fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be set to a long time or a short time according to the game state.
(3) In the latent probability variation state (high probability non-time reduction state), the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be set to a shorter time than in other gaming states (for example, normal state, low probability non-time reduction state, etc.). In addition, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set high (if it is not a big hit, the probability of winning a small hit is approximately 100% or close to it), and a prize is won in the large winning opening during the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set the number of balls to be ejected to increase even if the jackpot game is not executed in the latent probability change state.
(4) In the latent probability change state, the game proceeds in the right-handed state.

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the game machine including the performance display monitor and the setting changing device has been described, but in this case, the game machine may be provided with at least one of the following configurations.
(1) When setting is provided, the set value can be displayed on the performance display monitor.
(2) A plurality of types of winning probabilities of special symbol lottery (for example, winning probabilities of big hit lottery) are stored, and any probability can be set by operating a predetermined operating member or the like.
(3) Which probability is set (which setting is set) can be displayed on the performance display monitor 200. In this case, for example, after displaying the base value, the display of the set value is periodically switched to, a place where the LED is lit according to the set value (a place where the LED is lit according to the set value) is provided, or the set value is set. Information to be identified can be displayed.

The following modifications can be made to the out switch 99 (out sensor).
(1) Although one out switch 99 has been described in the example of being arranged in the confluence passage (total discharge passage) of the game board unit 8, it may be arranged in the total discharge passage on the main body frame side instead of the game board unit 8. .. In this way, the main body frame may be used as it is even if the game board unit 8 is replaced (because it may be reused), so that the cost is higher than that of mounting the out switch 99 on the game board unit 8. It can lead to reduction.

(2) Even if the number of out balls is calculated by providing out switches on the game board unit 8 side at or near each winning opening and each out opening and adding up the values detected by each out switch. Good.

(3) On the game board unit 8, an out sensor is provided near the exit of the launch rail and the entrance to the right-handed area, and the out-ball is detected by detecting the game ball hit in the game area before winning or out. You may find the number. Further, the out switches 99 may be provided not one but a plurality, and may be provided on the game board unit 8 (on the game area) like a gate.

In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, whether or not the time is shortened, and whether or not the value of the launch position designation status is "1" (whether or not the right-handed instruction is being given). I explained in the example of deciding whether to calculate the base by three items such as (?), But whether or not the value of the launch position designation status is "1" (whether or not the right-handed instruction is being given). It may be decided whether or not to calculate the base by only one item such as.

Further, depending on the game specifications, the combination can be freely set, such as determining only any two items or one of the above three items. For example, in the case of a game specification in which there is no time reduction state or right-handed state, it is possible to judge only one item of "whether or not the jackpot game is being executed", and it is also possible to judge the time reduction state or right-handed state. Even if the state is provided, it is possible to determine whether or not to calculate the base based on only one item of "whether or not the jackpot game is being executed".

In the above-described embodiment, the example of displaying the value obtained by dividing the normal number of prize balls by the normal number of outs is described as the base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200. For example, the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game is a big hit. You may display the value divided by the number of outs in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as a calculation method for calculating the base, the base is calculated by obtaining a value (quotient) twice the normal number of outs and then shifting the quotient by 1 bit to the right. The base may be calculated by the method of.

In the above-described embodiment, when the final base is obtained, if the lowest bit of the quotient is "1B", the quotient is shifted to the right by 1 bit, and then "1" is added to calculate the base. However, when the lowest bit of the quotient is "1B", the base may be calculated by adding "1" to the quotient and then shifting it by 1 bit to the right.

The main control device 70 may cause the performance display monitor 200 to perform the power-on operation when the power is turned on.
In the operation at power-on, from the time the power is turned on until the display of the base is started, four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 (may include dot segments) of the performance display monitor 200 are set in a predetermined pattern for checking the operation. It is an operation of lighting for a predetermined time by (all blinking, all lighting, sequential lighting, etc.).

Further, the lighting in such a predetermined pattern may be performed before the base is displayed, before the set value is displayed, or after the set value is displayed.
Then, when lighting in a predetermined pattern before displaying the set value, the set value cannot be displayed until the lighting in the predetermined pattern is completed, but when lighting in the predetermined pattern after displaying the set value, , There is an advantage that the set value can be confirmed at an early stage.

The performance display monitor 200 has been described with an example of switching between the base of the current section and the base of the previous section when displaying the base, but the display pattern is not limited to this, and the current display pattern is not limited to this. You may store the bases of more than two sections, such as the base of the section, the base of the previous section, and the base of the section two times before, and switch and display them.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

The following technical ideas can be extracted from the above-described embodiments.
(1) The first technical idea is a configuration in which one of "normal return", "RAM clear return", "setting reference mode", and "setting change mode" is performed by operation.
The game machine is provided with a setting change device and two input devices (switches), and shifts to one of four states (normal return, RAM clear return, setting reference mode, setting change mode) when the power is restored. The four states are determined by a combination of two input devices (four combinations of ON and OFF).

One input device is preferably a setting key switch. The other input device can be applied with a setting switch, a RAM clear switch, other switches, and the like.
If one of the input devices is turned off during the setting change, the setting is confirmed. In the conventional technique, since the setting is fixed when the lever is turned on, there is no technique that the setting is fixed when one of the input devices is turned off.
The setting during the setting change may be confirmed by another operation (for example, pressing a separately provided confirmation switch or other processing).

The game machine has a first input device (a switch that detects the operation state of the setting key) that can be turned ON / OFF for setting changes and a second input device (a state in which the RAM clear switch is pressed) that can be turned ON / OFF related to setting changes. A switch) and a means for setting four states (normal recovery state, RAM clear recovery state, setting reference mode state, setting change mode state) by combining the first input device and the second input device.

(2) The second technical idea is that when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor, it is displayed within the used area.
The game machine includes a performance display monitor capable of displaying the base and a setting changing device capable of changing the set value, and displays the set value on the performance display monitor.
In addition, the process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor is executed outside the area.

(3) The third technical idea is a configuration in which the original processing related to the performance display monitor is not performed during the setting change (reference).
The game machine executes the first process related to the performance display monitor and the second process related to the setting change, and during the execution of one process, at least a part of the execution of the other process is restricted.
In addition, the process of determining whether or not to limit is executed outside the area.

(4) The fourth technical idea is the reset process of the main command permission.
While the game machine is changing the setting or referring to the setting, the main control device 70 does not set the main command permission signal so that the command is not received from the payout control device 92 and the payout control device 92 is prohibited from paying out. doing.

(5) The fifth technical idea is a configuration in which a command indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted from the main control to the payout control.
While the setting is being changed or the setting is being referenced, the game machine transmits a payout operation stop command from the main control device 70 side to prohibit the payout control device 92 from paying out.

(6) The sixth technical idea is that when the setting change is completed, the process shifts to the evacuation process at the time of power failure.
The game machine executes a first process not related to the setting change and a second process related to the setting change, and after the second process is completed, at least a part of the first process is executed.
In addition, the gaming machine includes means for executing the process at the time of power restoration and means for executing the setting-related processing related to the setting change or setting reference, and after the execution of the setting-related processing, at least one of the processes at the time of power restoration is performed. Run the part.

(7) The seventh technical idea is a configuration relating to a setting key as a switch for shifting to a "setting change state" or a "setting confirmation state".
The game machine can change the setting using the setting key, there is an insertion part to insert the setting key, the setting key has ON / OFF, and when the setting key is ON, the setting key is from the insertion part. The setting can be changed without pulling out, and when the setting key is OFF, the setting key is pulled out from the insertion portion and the setting cannot be changed.
Further, in the game machine, if the setting key is turned off while the setting is being changed, the setting is confirmed.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 LCD display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery and a lottery execution means
A setting means capable of executing at least the setting process regarding the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, and
The winning openings placed in the game area and
A base calculation means for calculating a base based on the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired in the game area.
A base display device that displays the base and
A base-related processing execution means for executing a base-related process including at least one of a base calculation process executed when the base is calculated or a base display process executed when the base is displayed on the base display device.
The area used for the first process related to the progress of the game,
An unused area used for the second treatment other than the first treatment, and
At least the out of process and the base-related processing for the setting, during the execution of one process, and a limiting means for limiting the execution of at least part of the processing of the other processing,
The limiting means
It is determined whether or not one of the processes is being executed, and if it is determined that the other process is being executed, it is determined that the execution of at least a part of the other processes is restricted, and it is determined that the other process is not being executed. In that case, a judgment process for determining that the execution of at least a part of the other process is not restricted is executed.
The judgment process is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is a process executed using the unused area.